PCS 921 X Instruction Manual EN Domestic General X R1.02 (EN - FZBH5101.0086.0003) PDF

PCS-921
Breaker Failure Protection

Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface
Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Health and Safety
The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
 Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
 Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Instructions and Warnings
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection i

Date: 2013-02-21
Preface
The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
DANGER!
It means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
WARNING!
It means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION!
It means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are
disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the
protected equipment.
WARNING!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.
WARNING!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.
DANGER!
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING!
 Exposed terminals
Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
ii PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2013-02-21
Preface
generated is dangerous
 Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION!
 Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed
 Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
 Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
Copyright
Version: R1.02 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China
P/N: EN_FZBH5101.0084.0003 Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208
Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com
Copyright © NR 2013. All rights reserved Email: nr_techsupport@nari-relays.com
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection iii

Date: 2013-02-21
Preface
Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:
1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.
2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.
3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.
4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.
5 Management
Introduce the management function (measurment, recording and remote control) of this relay.
6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the
definition of pins of each plug-in module.
7 Settings
List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc.,
and some notes about the setting application.
8 Human Machine Interface

Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through
HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.
9 Configurable Function
Introduce configurable function of the device and all configurable signals are listed.
10 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.
11 Installation
iv PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2013-02-21
Preface
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.
12 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.
13 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.
14 Decommissioning and Disposal

A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.
15 Manual Version History

List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.
Typographic and Graphical Conventions
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
&
AND gate
≥1
OR gate
Comparator
BI Binary signal via opto-coupler
EBI Enabling binary input, an input via opto-coupler for function enabling
VEBI Virtual enabling binary signal, a signal for enabling function via
communication media by software tool
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection v

Date: 2013-02-21
Preface
SET I> Input signal from comparator with setting
EN Input signal of logic setting for function enabling
SIG Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler
OTH Input of other signal
XXX Output signal
Timer
t
Timer (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)
t
10ms 0ms
Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay drop off (0ms), non-settable]
[XXX] 0ms
Timer (delay pickup, settable)
0ms [XXX]
Timer (delay drop off, settable)
[XXX] [XXX]
Timer (delay pickup, delay drop off, settable)
IDMT Timer (inverse-time characteristic)
---xxx is the symbol
Symbol Corresponding Relationship
Basic Example
A, B, C L1, L2, L3 Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN
AN, BN, CN L1N, L2N, L3N Ua, Ub, Uc VL1, VL2, VL3
ABC L123 Uab, Ubc, Uca VL12, VL23, VL31
U (voltage) V U0, U1, U2 VN, V1, V2
vi PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2013-02-21
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Features ........................................................................................................... 1-3
List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921............................................................................... 1-1
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-a

Date: 2011-07-26
1 Introduction
1-b PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2011-07-26
1 Introduction
1.1 Application
The PCS-921 is a digital breaker protection device and can be applied for all kinds of busbar
arrangement. By default, breaker failure protection, overcurrent protection, dead zone protection,
pole discrepancy protection and automatic reclosing function is taken as the standard function of
PCS-921.
PCS-921 supports configurable binary inputs, binary outputs, LEDs and IEC 61850 protocol.
Bus 1
PCS-921
52
Line 1 50BF 62PD 50/51G 50/51P
50DZ 25 79
52
Line 2
52
Bus 2
Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921
No. Function ANSI

1. Breaker failure protection 50BF
2. Pole discrepancy protection 62PD
3. Two stages earth-fault protection 50/51G
4. Two stages overcurrent protection 50/51P
5. Dead zone protection 50DZ
6. Synchro-checking 25
7. Auto- reclosing 79
1.2 Function
1. Protection Function
 Breaker failure protection (50BF)
 Pole discrepancy protection (62PD)
 Dead zone protection (50DZ)
 Two stages overcurrent protection (50/51P)
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-1

Date: 2011-07-26
1 Introduction
 Two stages earth-fault protection (50/51G)
2. Logic
 User programmable logic
3. Additional function
 VT circuit supervision (VTS)
 CT circuit supervision (CTS)
 Self diagnostic
 DC power supply supervision
 Voltage and current drift auto regulation
 Auto-reclosing (79)
 Synchro-checking (25)
 Event recorder including 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events and 1024 device logs.
 Disturbance recorder including 64 disturbance records with waveforms (The file format of
disturbance recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file.)
 Clock synchronization
– PPS (RS-485)
– IRIG-B (RS-485)
– PPM (DIN)
– SNTP (PTP)
– IEEE1588
– SNTP (BC)
– PPS (DIN)
4. Monitoring
 Number of circuit breaker operation (single-phase tripping, three-phase tripping and

reclosing)
 Frequency
5. Communication
 2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol or DNP3.0 protocol
 1 RS-485 communication rear port for clock synchronization
 Up to 4 Ethernet ports (depend on the chosen type of MON plug-in module) conform to IEC
1-2 PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2011-07-26
1 Introduction
61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP
 Up to 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber (ST interface or SC interface, depend on the chosen type
of MON plug-in module) conform to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103
protocol over TCP/IP
 GOOSE communication function (optional NET-DSP plug-in module)
6. User Interface
 Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.
 1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting
 1 RS-232 rear port for printer
 Language switchover – English + selected language
 Auxiliary software – PCS-Explorer
1.3 Features
 The intelligent device integrated with protection, control and monitor provides powerful
protection function, flexible protection configuration, user programmable logic and
configurable binary input and binary output, which can meet with various application
requirements.
 High-performance hardware platform and modularized design, MCU (management control

unit)+DSP (digital signal processor). MCU manages general fault detector element and DSP
manages protection and metering. Their data acquisition system is completely independent in
electronic circuit. DC power supply of output relay is controlled by the operation of fault
detector element operates, this prevents maloperation due to error from ADC or damage of
any apparatus.
 Flexible automatic reclosure supports various initiation modes and check modes.
 Multiple setting groups with password protection and setting value saved permanently before
modification.
 Powerful PC tool software can fulfill protection function configuration, modify setting and
waveform analysis.

Date: 2011-07-26
1 Introduction

Date: 2011-07-26
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1

2.1.1 AC Current Input .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.3 Power Supply....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Mechanical Specifications ............................................................................. 2-3

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-3
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.2 Ethernet Port........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-4
2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-5

2.5.1 Environmental Tests ............................................................................................................ 2-5
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-5
2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-6

2.7 Protective Functions....................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.1 Fault Detector ...................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.2 Phase Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.3 Earth Fault Protection .......................................................................................................... 2-7
2.7.4 Dead Zone Protection.......................................................................................................... 2-7

Date: 2013-02-21
2 Technical Data
2.7.5 Breaker Failure Protection ................................................................................................... 2-7
2.7.6 Pole Discrepancy Protection ............................................................................................... 2-7
2.7.7 Auto-reclosing ...................................................................................................................... 2-7

Date: 2013-02-21
2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 AC Current Input
Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz
Rated current (In) 1A 5A
Linear to 0.05In~40In (It should measure current without beyond full scale
against 20 times of related current and value of DC offset by 100%.)
Thermal withstand
-continuously 4In
-for 10s 30In
-for 1s 100In
-for half a cycle 250In
Burden < 0.15VA/phase @In < 0.25VA/phase @In
Number Up to 6 current input according to various applications
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input

Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz
Rated voltage (Un) 100V~130V
Linear to 1V~170V
Thermal withstand
-continuously 200V
-10s 260V
-1s 300V
Burden at rated < 0.20VA/phase @Un
Number Up to 6 voltage input according to various applications
2.1.3 Power Supply

Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc, 220Vdc/250Vdc
Permissible voltage range 88~300Vdc
Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden
Quiescent condition <30W
Operating condition <35W
2.1.4 Binary Input

Rated voltage 24V 48V
Rated current drain 1.2mA 2.4mA
Pickup voltage 13~17V 26~34V
Dropoff voltage 50% of pickup voltage

Date: 2013-02-21
2 Technical Data
Maximum permissible voltage 100Vdc

Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously )
Response time for logic input ≤1ms
Number Up to 36 binary input according to various hardware configurations
Rated voltage 110V 125V 220V 250V

Rated current drain 1.1mA 1.25mA 2.2mA 2.5mA
Pickup voltage 60.5~77V 70~87.5V 121~154V
Dropoff voltage 50% of pickup voltage
Maximum permissible voltage 300Vdc
Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously )
Response time for logic input ≤1ms
Number Up to 36 binary input according to various hardware configurations
2.1.5 Binary Output

1. Tripping/signaling contact
Output mode Potential free contact

5A@380Vac
Continuous carry
5A@250Vdc
Pickup time <8ms (typical 5ms)
Dropoff time <5ms
0.65A@48Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.30A@110Vdc
0.15A@220Vdc
Burden 300mW
380Vac
Maximal system voltage
250Vdc
Test voltage across open contact 1000V RMS for 1min
6A@3s
Short duration current 15A@0.5s
30A@0.2s
Number Up to 55 binary output according to various hardware configurations
2. Fast signaling contact
Output mode Potential free contact

5A@380Vac
Continuous carry
5A@250Vdc
Pickup time <1ms
Dropoff time <5ms
1.0A@48Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=0ms) 0.9A@110Vdc
0.4A@220Vdc
Maximal system voltage 380Vac

Date: 2013-02-21
2 Technical Data
250Vdc
Test voltage across open contact 1000V RMS for 1min
2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Enclosure dimensions (W×H×D) 482.6mm×177.0mm×291.0mm
Mounting Way Flush mounted
Trepanning dimensions (W×H) 450.0mm×179.0mm, M6 screw
Chassis color Silver grey
Weight per device Approx. 15kg
Chassis material Aluminum alloy
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Device structure Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate
Protection class
Front side IP40, up to IP51 (With cover)
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection terminals IP20
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C (Readability of disaply may be impaired below -20°C)
Transport and storage temperature
-40°C to +70°C
range
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation
Pollution degree 2
Altitude <3000m
2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port
Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Maximal capacity 32
Transmission distance <500m
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable
2.4.2 Ethernet Port

Connector type RJ-45
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 100Base-TX

Date: 2013-02-21
2 Technical Data
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850

2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port

2.4.3.1 For Station Level
Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type ST, SC
Fibre type Multi mode
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.2 For Process Level

Connector type LC
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port

Connector type ST
Wave length 820nm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.4 Print Port

Type RS-232
Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
®
Printer type EPSON 300K printer
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port

Type RS-485
Maximal capacity 32

Date: 2013-02-21
2 Technical Data
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B

2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007

Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:2005
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I

Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I
2.5.3 Electrical Tests

Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min
Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Insulation resistance
Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC
measurements
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

IEC 60255-22-1:2007
1MHz burst disturbance test Common mode: class III 2.5kV
Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV
Electrostatic discharge test For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
Radio frequency interference tests Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
IEC 60255-22-4:2008
Fast transient disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
Surge immunity test IEC 60255-22-5:2008

Date: 2013-02-21
2 Technical Data
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us

Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Conducted RF Electromagnetic
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
Disturbance
kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Immunity class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10:2001
immunity class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m
Auxiliary power supply performance IEC60255-11: 2008

- Voltage dips Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
-Voltage short interruptions 100ms for interruption without rebooting
2.6 Certifications
 ISO9001:2008
 ISO14001:2004
 OHSAS18001:2007
 ISO10012:2003
 CMMI L4
 EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999
 Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001
2.7 Protective Functions

2.7.1 Fault Detector
2.7.1.1 DPFC Current Element
Setting range 0.050In~30.000In (A)

Accuracy ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater
2.7.1.2 Residual Current Element


Date: 2013-02-21
2 Technical Data
2.7.2 Phase Overcurrent Protection

Time delay 0.000~20.000s
Accuracy ≤1% of Setting+30ms (at 2 times current setting)
2.7.3 Earth Fault Protection

Time delay 0.000~20.000 (s)
2.7.4 Dead Zone Protection

Setting range 0.050In~30.000In
Accuracy ≤2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater
Time delay 0.000~10.000s
Accuracy ≤1% of Setting +30ms
2.7.5 Breaker Failure Protection

Pick-up time <20ms
Drop-off time <20ms
Setting range of phase current 0.050In~30.000In
Setting range of residual current 0.050In~30.000In
Setting range of negative-sequence current 0.050In~30.000In
Time delay (first) 0.000~10.000s
Time delay (second) 0.000~10.000s
2.7.6 Pole Discrepancy Protection

Setting range (residual current) 0.050In~30.000In (A)
Setting range (negative-sequence current) 0.050In~30.000In (A)
Accuracy ≤2.5% of setting 0.02In whichever is greater
Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.000~600.000 (s)
2.7.7 Auto-reclosing
Phase difference setting range 0~89 (Deg)
Accuracy 2.0Deg
0.02Un~0.8Un (V)
Voltage difference setting range
(Un:Secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage)
Accuracy Max(0.01Un, 2.5%)

Date: 2013-02-21
2 Technical Data
Frequency difference setting range 0.02~1 (Hz)

Accuracy 0.01Hz
Operating time of synchronism check ≤1%Setting+20ms
Operating time of energizing check ≤1%Setting+20ms
Operating time of auto-reclosing ≤1%Setting+20ms

Date: 2013-02-21
3 Operation Theory
3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3.1 System Parameters ......................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 General Application ............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.3 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Circuit Breaker Position Supervision ............................................................ 3-1

3.2.3 Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.4 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.6 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3 Fault Detector (FD) .......................................................................................... 3-4

3.3.2 Fault Detector in Fault Detector DSP .................................................................................. 3-4
3.3.3 Protection Fault Detector in Protection Calculation DSP .................................................... 3-6
3.3.4 Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.5 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.7 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-8
3.4 Auxiliary Element ............................................................................................ 3-8

3.4.3 Function Block Diagram .....................................................................................................3-11
3.4.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-14

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.4.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-17
3.5 Phase Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................... 3-19

3.5.1 General Application ........................................................................................................... 3-19
3.5.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-19
3.5.3 Protection Principle ............................................................................................................ 3-19
3.5.4 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.5 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-20
3.5.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.6 Earth Fault Protection................................................................................... 3-22

3.6.5 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.6.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-24
3.6.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-24
3.7 Dead Zone Protection ................................................................................... 3-25

3.7.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-26
3.7.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.7.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.8 Breaker Failure Protection ........................................................................... 3-27

3.8.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-28

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.8.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-29
3.8.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.9 Pole Discrepancy Protection........................................................................ 3-31

3.9.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-31
3.9.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-32
3.9.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-32
3.10 Synchrocheck ............................................................................................. 3-33

3.10.1 General Application ......................................................................................................... 3-33
3.10.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-33
3.10.3 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-40
3.10.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-41
3.10.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-42
3.11 Automatic Reclosure................................................................................... 3-44

3.11.1 General Application .......................................................................................................... 3-44
3.11.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 3-46
3.11.4 I/O Signals........................................................................................................................ 3-46
3.11.5 Logic................................................................................................................................. 3-48
3.11.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-59
3.12 Trip Logic ..................................................................................................... 3-61

3.12.1 Application ....................................................................................................................... 3-61
3.12.3 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-61
3.12.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-62
3.12.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-63
3.13 VT Circuit Supervision ................................................................................ 3-63

3.13.1 General Application ......................................................................................................... 3-63
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 3-c

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.13.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-64
3.13.4 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.13.5 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-65
3.13.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-65
3.14 CT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................... 3-66

3.14.1 Application ....................................................................................................................... 3-66
3.14.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-66
3.14.4 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-66
3.14.5 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-67
List of Figures
Figure 3.2-1 CB position supervision........................................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3.2-2 Logic diagram of CB position supervision ......................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.3-1 Flow chart of protection program ........................................................................ 3-7
Figure 3.3-2 Logic diagram of fault detector ............................................................................ 3-8
Figure 3.4-1 Logic diagram of auxiliary element ................................................................... 3-17
Figure 3.5-1 Logic diagram of phase overcurrent protection .............................................. 3-21
Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of earth-fault protection ............................................................ 3-24
Figure 3.7-1 Logic diagram of dead zone protection ............................................................ 3-26
Figure 3.8-1 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection ..................................................... 3-29
Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of pole discrepancy protection................................................. 3-32
Figure 3.10-1 Relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage ............ 3-33
Figure 3.10-2 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement ...................................... 3-35
Figure 3.10-3 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement ...................................... 3-35
Figure 3.10-4 Voltage connection for double busbars arrangement ................................... 3-36
Figure 3.10-5 Voltage selection for double busbars arrangement....................................... 3-36
Figure 3.10-6 Voltage connection for one and a half breakers arrangement ..................... 3-37
Figure 3.10-7 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement ......................... 3-38
3-d PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.10-8 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement ......................... 3-39
Figure 3.10-9 Synchronism check ........................................................................................... 3-41
Figure 3.10-10 Dead charge check logic................................................................................. 3-42
Figure 3.10-11 Synchrocheck logic ......................................................................................... 3-42
Figure 3.11-1 Logic diagram of AR ready ............................................................................... 3-49
Figure 3.11-2 Single-phase tripping initiating AR .................................................................. 3-51
Figure 3.11-3 Three-phase tripping initiating AR ................................................................... 3-51
Figure 3.11-4 1-pole AR initiation............................................................................................. 3-52
Figure 3.11-5 3-pole AR initiation............................................................................................. 3-52
Figure 3.11-6 One-shot AR ....................................................................................................... 3-53
Figure 3.11-7 Extra time delay and blocking logic of AR ...................................................... 3-53
Figure 3.11-8 Reclosing output logic ...................................................................................... 3-54
Figure 3.11-9 Reclosing failure and success ......................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.11-10 Single-phase transient fault ............................................................................ 3-58
Figure 3.11-11 Single-phase permanent fault ([79.N_Rcls]=2) ............................................. 3-58
Figure 3.12-1 Simplified trip logic............................................................................................ 3-62
Figure 3.13-1 Logic diagram of VT circuit supervision ......................................................... 3-65
Figure 3.13-2 Logic diagram of VT neutral point supervision .............................................. 3-65
Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of CT circuit failure .................................................................. 3-67
List of Tables
Table 3.1-1 System parameters .................................................................................................. 3-1
Table 3.2-1 I/O signals of CB position supervision ................................................................. 3-2
Table 3.2-2 Internal setting of CB position supervision .......................................................... 3-4
Table 3.3-1 I/O signals of fault detector .................................................................................... 3-7
Table 3.3-2 Settings of fault detector ........................................................................................ 3-8
Table 3.4-1 I/O signals of auxiliary element ............................................................................ 3-12
Table 3.4-2 Settings of auxiliary element ................................................................................ 3-17
Table 3.5-1 I/O signals of phase overcurrent protection ....................................................... 3-20
Table 3.5-2 Settings of phase overcurrent protection ........................................................... 3-21
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 3-e

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.6-1 I/O signals of earth fault protection ..................................................................... 3-23
Table 3.6-2 Settings of earth fault protection ......................................................................... 3-24
Table 3.7-1 I/O signals of dead zone protection ..................................................................... 3-26
Table 3.7-2 Settings of dead zone protection ......................................................................... 3-26
Table 3.8-1 I/O signals of breaker failure protection ............................................................. 3-28
Table 3.8-2 Settings of breaker failure protection ................................................................. 3-30
Table 3.9-1 I/O signals of pole discrepancy protection ......................................................... 3-31
Table 3.9-2 Settings of pole discrepancy protection ............................................................. 3-32
Table 3.10-1 I/O signals of synchrocheck ............................................................................... 3-40
Table 3.10-2 Settings of synchrocheck ................................................................................... 3-42
Table 3.11-1 I/O signals of auto-reclosing .............................................................................. 3-46
Table 3.11-2 Reclosing number ................................................................................................ 3-56
Table 3.11-3 Settings of auto-reclosing................................................................................... 3-59
Table 3.12-1 I/O signals of trip logic ........................................................................................ 3-61
Table 3.12-2 Settings of trip logic ............................................................................................ 3-63
Table 3.13-1 I/O signals of VT circuit supervision ................................................................. 3-64
Table 3.13-2 Settings of VT circuit supervision ..................................................................... 3-65
Table 3.14-1 I/O signals of CT circuit supervision ................................................................. 3-66
3-f PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.1 System Parameters

3.1.1 General Application
The device performs various protection functions by respective algorithms with the information
(currents and voltages) acquired from primary system through current transformer and voltage
transformer, so it is important to configure analog input channels correctly.
Further to correct configuration of analog input channels, other protected system information, such
as the parameters of voltage transformer and current transformer are also required.
3.1.2 Function Description
The device generally considers transmission line as its protected object, current flows from busbar
to line is considered as the forward direction.
3.1.3 Settings
Table 3.1-1 System parameters
No. Name Range Step Unit Remark

1 Active_Grp 1~10 1 Active setting group
2 Opt_SysFreq 50 or 60 Hz System frequency
3 PrimaryEquip_Name The description of the primary equipment
Primary rated value of VT
4 U1n 33.00~65500.00 0.01 kV
(phase-to-phase)
Secondary rated value of VT
5 U2n 80.00~220.00 0.01 V
(phase-to-phase)
6 I1n 100~65500 1 A Primary rated value of CT
7 I2n 1 or 5 A Secondary rated value of CT
Frequency upper limit setting
The device will issue an alarm
8 f_High_FreqAlm 50~65 1 Hz
[Alm_Freq], when system frequency is
higher than the setting.
Frequency lower limit setting
The device will issue an alarm
9 f_Low_FreqAlm 45~60 1 Hz
[Alm_Freq], when system frequency is
lower than the setting.
3.2 Circuit Breaker Position Supervision

The status of circuit breaker (CB) position is applied for protection and control functions in this
device, such as, auto-reclose and VT circuit supervision, etc. The status of CB position can be
applied as input signals for other features configured by user.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
The signal reflecting CB position is acquired via opto-coupler with settable delay pick-up and
drop-off, and forms digital signal used by protection functions. CB position can reflect the status of
each phase by means of phase-segregated inputs.
In order to prevent that wrong status of CB position is input into the device via binary input,
appropriate monitor method is used to check the rationality of the binary input. When the binary
input of CB open position is detected, the status of CB position will be thought as incorrect and an
alarm [Alm_52b] will be issued if there is current detected in the line.
3.2.3 Function Block Diagram
1. For phase-segregated circuit breaker
CB Position Supervision
I3P Alm_52b
52b_PhA
52b_PhB
52b_PhC
2. For non-phase segregated circuit breaker
CB Position Supervision
I3P Alm_52b
52b
3.2.4 I/O Signals
Table 3.2-1 I/O signals of CB position supervision
No. Input Signal Description

1 I3P Three-phase current input
2 52b_PhA Normally closed contact of A-phase of circuit breaker
3 52b_PhB Normally closed contact of B-phase of circuit breaker
4 52b_PhC Normally closed contact of C-phase of circuit breaker
5 52b Normally closed contact of three-phase of circuit breaker
No. Output Signal Description
1 Alm_52b CB position is abnormal

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.2.5 Logic
BI 52b_PhA &
>=1
52b_A_CB
BI 52b_PhB &
>=1
52b_B_CB
BI 52b_PhC &
>=1
52b_C_CB
EN [En_3PhCB] &
BI 52b
Figure 3.2-1 CB position supervision
SIG [52b_PhA] &

&
SIG [52b_PhB] & &
>=1
SIG [52b_PhC] &
& &
>=1 10s 10s Alm_52b
SIG Ia>I_Line
&
SIG Ib>I_Line
&
SIG Ic>I_Line
Figure 3.2-2 Logic diagram of CB position supervision
Where:
1. I_Line is threshold value used to determine whether line is on-load or no-load. Default value
0.06In.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.2.6 Settings
Table 3.2-2 Internal setting of CB position supervision

This setting is used to determine whether CB position is
determined by phase-segregated auxiliary contact or
three-phase auxiliary contact
1 En_3PhCB 0 or 1
1: phase-segregated contact ([52b_PhA], [52b_PhB],
[52b_PhC])
0: three-phase contact ([52b])
3.3 Fault Detector (FD)

The device has one DSP module with fault detector DSP and protection DSP for fault detector and
protection calculation respectively. Protection DSP with protection fault detector element is
responsible for calculation of protection elements, and fault detector DSP is responsible to
determine fault appearance on the protected power system. Fault detector in fault detector DSP
picks up to provide positive supply to output relays. The output relays can only operate when both
the fault detector in fault detector DSP and a protection element operate simultaneously.
Otherwise, the output relays would not operate. An alarm message will be issued with blocking
outputs if a protection element operates while the fault detector does not operate.
3.3.2 Fault Detector in Fault Detector DSP
Main part of FD is DPFC current detector element that detects the change of phase-to-phase
power frequency current, and residual current fault detector element that calculates the vector
sum of 3 phase currents as supplementary. They are continuously calculating the analog input
signals.
The FD pickup condition in this device includes:
1. Pickup condition 1: DPFC current is greater than the setting value
2. Pickup condition 2: Residual current is greater than the setting value
If any of the above conditions is complied, the FD will operate to activate the output circuit
providing DC power supply to the output relays.
DPFC current fault detector element (pickup condition 1) and residual current fault detector
element (pickup condition 2) are always enabled, and all protection functions are permitted to
operate when they operate.
3.3.2.1 Fault Detector Based on DPFC Current (pickup condition 1)
DPFC phase-to-phase current is obtained by subtracting the phase-to-phase current from that of a
cycle before.
ΔI = I(k)-I(k-24)

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
Where:
I(k) is the sampling value at a point.
I(k-24) is the value of a sampling point before a cycle, 24 is the sampling points in one cycle.
200
100
-100
-200
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Original Current
100
50
-50
-100
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
DPFC current
From above figures, it is concluded that DPFC can reflect the sudden change of current at the
initial stage of a fault and has a perfect performance of fault detection.
It is used to determine whether this pickup condition is met according to Equation 3.3-1.
For multi-phase short-circuit fault, the DPFC phase-to-phase current has high sensitivity to ensure
the pickup of protection device. For usual single phase to earth fault, it also has sufficient
sensitivity to pick up except the earth fault with very large fault resistance. Under this condition the
DPFC current is relative small, however, residual current is also used to judge pickup condition
(pickup condition 2).
This element adopts adaptive floating threshold varied with the change of load current
continuously. The change of load current is small and steadily under normal or power swing
condition, the adaptive floating threshold with the ΔISet is higher than the change of current under
these conditions and hence maintains the element stability.
The criterion is:
ΔIΦΦMAX>1.25ΔITh+ΔISet Equation 3.3-1
Where:
ΔIΦΦMAX: The maximum half-wave integration value of phase-to-phase current (ΦΦ=AB, BC, CA)
ΔISet: The fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set])
ΔITh: The floating threshold value
The coefficient “1.25” is an empirical value which ensures the threshold always higher than the

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
unbalance output value of the system.
If operating condition is met, DPFC current element will pickup and trigger FD to provide DC power
supply for output relays, the FD operation signal will maintain 7 seconds after DPFC current
element drops off.
3.3.2.2 Fault Detector Based on Residual Current (pickup condition 2)
This pickup condition will be met when 3I0 is greater than the setting [FD.ROC.3I0_Set].
Where:
3I0: residual current calculates from the vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic
When residual current FD element operates and lasts for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm
[Alm_PersistI0] will be issued.
If operating condition is met, the residual current FD element will pickup and trigger FD to provide
DC power supply for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept for 7 seconds after the residual
current FD element drops off.
3.3.3 Protection Fault Detector in Protection Calculation DSP
The protection device is running either of the two programs: one is “Regular program” for normal
state, and the other is “Fault calculation program” after protection fault detector picks up.
Under the normal state, the protection device will perform the following tasks:
1. Calculate analog quantity
2. Read binary input
3. Hardware self-check
4. Circuit breaker position supervision
5. Analog quantity input supervision
Once the protection fault detector element in protection calculation DSP picks up, the protection
device will switch to fault calculation program, for example the calculation of phase overcurrent
protection, and to determine logic. If the fault is within the protected zone, the protection device will
send tripping command.
The protection program flow chart is shown as Figure 3.3-1.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
Main program
Sampling program
No Yes
Pickup?
Regular program Fault calculation program
Figure 3.3-1 Flow chart of protection program
The protection FD pickup conditions are the same as the FD in fault detector DSP as shown below.
The operation criteria for the conditions are also the same as that in fault detector DSP. Please
refer to section 3.3.2 for details.
1. Pickup condition 1: DPFC current is greater than the setting value
2. Pickup condition 2: Residual current is greater than the setting value
When any pickup condition mentioned above is met, the protection device will go to fault
calculation state.
FD
I3P FD.Pkp
FD.DPFC.Pkp
FD.ROC.Pkp
3.3.5 I/O Signals
Table 3.3-1 I/O signals of fault detector

1 FD.Pkp The device picks up
2 FD.DPFC.Pkp DPFC current fault detector element operates.
3 FD.ROC.Pkp Residual current fault detector element operates.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.3.6 Logic
OTH Ia Calculate DPFC phase-to-phase OTH △ Iab>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]

current >=1
OTH Ib △ Iab=△ (Ia-Ib) OTH △ Ibc>[FD.DPFC.I_Set] FD.DPFC.Pkp
△ Ibc=△ (Ib-Ic)
△ Ica=△ (Ic-Ia)
OTH Ic OTH △ Ica>[FD.DPFC.I_Set] >=1
0s 7s FD.Pkp
Calculate residual current OTH 3I0>[FD.ROC.3I0_Set] FD.ROC.Pkp

3I0=Ia+Ib+Ic
Figure 3.3-2 Logic diagram of fault detector
3.3.7 Settings
Table 3.3-2 Settings of fault detector

Current setting of DPFC current fault
1 FD.DPFC.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
detector element
Current setting of residual current fault
2 FD.ROC.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
detector element
3.4 Auxiliary Element

Auxiliary element (AuxE) is mainly used to program logics to meet users’ applications or further
improve operating reliability of protection elements. Reliability of protective elements is assured,
auxiliary element is usually not required to configure. Auxiliary elements including current change
auxiliary element (AuxE.OCD), residual current auxiliary element (AuxE.ROC), phase current
auxiliary element (AuxE.OC), voltage change auxiliary element (AuxE.UVD), phase under voltage
auxiliary element (AuxE.UVG), phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element (AuxE.UVS) and
residual voltage auxiliary element (AuxE.ROV), and they can be enabled or disabled by
corresponding logic setting or binary inputs. Users can configure them according to applications
via PCS-Explorer software.
1. Current change auxiliary element AuxE.OCD
It shares DPFC current element of DPFC fault detector. If DPFC fault detector operates
(FD.DPFC.Pkp=1) and current change auxiliary element is enabled, current change auxiliary
element operates.
2. Residual current auxiliary element AuxE.ROC
There are 3 stages for residual current auxiliary element (AuxE.ROC1, AuxE.ROC2 and
AuxE.ROC3). Each residual current auxiliary element will operate instantly if calculated residual
current amplitude is larger than corresponding current setting

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
The criteria are:
AuxE.ROC1: 3I0>[AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set]
Where:
3I0: The calculated residual current
3. Phase current auxiliary element AuxE.OC
There are 3 stages for phase current auxiliary element (AuxE.OC1, AuxE.OC2 and AuxE.OC3).
Each phase current auxiliary element will operate instantly if phase current amplitude is larger than
corresponding current setting.
The criteria are:
AuxE.OC1: IΦMAX>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set]
Where:
IΦMAX: The maximum phase current among three phases
4. Voltage change auxiliary element AuxE.UVD
AuxE.UVD is based on phase-to-ground voltage change measured in all three phases.
The criterion is:
Δ UΦMAX>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]
Where:
ΔUΦMAX: The maximum phase-to-ground voltage change among three phases
5. Phase under voltage auxiliary element AuxE.UVG
AuxE.UVG will operate instantly if any phase-to-ground voltage is lower than corresponding
voltage setting.
The criterion is:
UΦMIN<[ AuxE.UVG.U_Set]
Where:
UΦMIN: The minimum value among three phase-to-ground voltages
6. Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element AuxE.UVS
AuxE.UVS will operate instantly if any phase-to-phase voltage is lower than corresponding voltage

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
setting.
The criterion is:
UΦΦMIN<[ AuxE.UVS.U_Set]
Where:
UΦΦMIN: The minimum value among three phase-to-phase voltages
7. Residual voltage auxiliary element AuxE.ROV
AuxE.ROV will operate instantly if calculated residual voltage is larger than corresponding voltage
setting.
The criterion is:
3U0>[ AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set]
Where:
3U0: The calculated residual voltage

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
AuxE
AuxE.OCD.En AuxE.St
AuxE.OCD.Blk AuxE.OCD.St_Ext
AuxE.ROCx.En AuxE.OCD.On
AuxE.ROCx.Blk AuxE.ROCx.St
AuxE.OCx.En AuxE.ROCx.On
AuxE.OCx.Blk AuxE.OCx.St
AuxE.UVD.En AuxE.OCx.StA
AuxE.UVD.Blk AuxE.OCx.StB
AuxE.UVG.En AuxE.OCx.StC
AuxE.UVG.Blk AuxE.OCx.On
AuxE.UVS.En AuxE.UVD.St
AuxE.UVS.Blk AuxE.UVD.St_Ext
AuxE.ROV.En AuxE.UVD.On
AuxE.ROV.Blk AuxE.UVG.St
AuxE.UVG.StA
AuxE.UVG.StB
AuxE.UVG.StC
AuxE.UVG.On
AuxE.UVS.St
AuxE.UVS.StAB
AuxE.UVS.StBC
AuxE.UVS.StCA
AuxE.UVS.On
AuxE.ROV.St
AuxE.ROV.On
Where:
x can be 1, 2 or 3

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.4.4 I/O Signals
Table 3.4-1 I/O signals of auxiliary element

Current change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
1 AuxE.OCD.En
programmable logic etc.
Current change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
2 AuxE.OCD.Blk
Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
3 AuxE.ROC1.En
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
4 AuxE.ROC1.Blk
5 AuxE.ROC2.En
6 AuxE.ROC2.Blk
7 AuxE.ROC3.En
8 AuxE.ROC3.Blk
Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
9 AuxE.OC1.En
Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
10 AuxE.OC1.Blk
11 AuxE.OC2.En
12 AuxE.OC2.Blk
13 AuxE.OC3.En
14 AuxE.OC3.Blk
Voltage change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
15 AuxE.UVD.En
Voltage change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
16 AuxE.UVD.Blk
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered
17 AuxE.UVG.En
from binary input or programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered
18 AuxE.UVG.Blk
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
19 AuxE.UVS.En
20 AuxE.UVS.Blk Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory

Residual voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input
21 AuxE.ROV.En
or programmable logic etc.
Residual voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
22 AuxE.ROV.Blk
24 U3P Three-phase voltage input
1 AuxE.St Any auxiliary element of the device operates
2 AuxE.OCD.St_Ext Current change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).
3 AuxE.OCD.On Current change auxiliary element is enabled
4 AuxE.ROC1.St Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element operates.
5 AuxE.ROC1.On Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element is enabled
10 AuxE.OC1.St Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates.
11 AuxE.OC1.StA Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase A).
12 AuxE.OC1.StB Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase B).
13 AuxE.OC1.StC Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase C).
14 AuxE.OC1.On Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element is enabled
25 AuxE.UVD.St Voltage change auxiliary element operates.
26 AuxE.UVD.St_Ext Voltage change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).
27 AuxE.UVD.On Voltage change auxiliary element is enabled
28 AuxE.UVG.St Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates.
29 AuxE.UVG.StA Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase A).
30 AuxE.UVG.StB Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase B).
31 AuxE.UVG.StC Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase C).
32 AuxE.UVG.On Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element is enabled
33 AuxE.UVS.St Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates.
34 AuxE.UVS.StAB Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase AB).
35 AuxE.UVS.StBC Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase BC).

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
36 AuxE.UVS.StCA Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase CA).

37 AuxE.UVS.On Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element is enabled
38 AuxE.ROV.St Residual voltage auxiliary element operates.
39 AuxE.ROV.On Residual voltage auxiliary element is enabled
3.4.5 Logic
SIG FD.DPFC.Pkp
SIG AuxE.OCD.En
&
& 0s [AuxE.OCD.t_DDO] AuxE.OCD.St_Ext
SIG AuxE.OCD.Blk
AuxE.OCD.On
En AuxE.OCD.En
SIG Ia
Calculate residual
SIG Ib current:
3I0=Ia+Ib+Ic
SIG Ic
3I0>[AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set] &
SIG AuxE.ROC1.En
& AuxE.ROC1.St
SIG AuxE.ROC1.Blk
AuxE.ROC1.On
En AuxE.ROC1.En
SIG AuxE.ROC2.En
& AuxE.ROC2.St
SIG AuxE.ROC2.Blk
AuxE.ROC2.On
En AuxE.ROC2.En
SIG AuxE.ROC3.En
& AuxE.ROC3.St
SIG AuxE.ROC3.Blk
AuxE.ROC3.On
En AuxE.ROC3.En

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
SIG Ia Ia>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set] &

AuxE.OC1.StA
SIG Ib Ib>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set] &

AuxE.OC1.StB
SIG Ic Ic>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set] &

AuxE.OC1.StC
>=1
SIG AuxE.OC1.En
&
& AuxE.OC1.St
SIG AuxE.OC1.Blk
En AuxE.OC1.En AuxE.OC1.On

AuxE.OC2.StA

AuxE.OC2.StB

AuxE.OC2.StC
>=1
SIG AuxE.OC2.En
&
& AuxE.OC2.St
SIG AuxE.OC2.Blk

AuxE.OC3.StA

AuxE.OC3.StB

AuxE.OC3.StC
>=1
SIG AuxE.OC3.En
&
& AuxE.OC3.St
SIG AuxE.OC3.Blk

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
SIG Ua Calculate DPFC phase ΔUa>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]

voltage >=1
SIG Ub △ Ua=△ (Ua-Ufa) ΔUb>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set] &
△ Ub=△ (Ub-Ufb)
AuxE.UVD.St
SIG Uc △ Uc=△ (Uc-Ufc) ΔUc>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]
0s [AuxE.UVD.t_DDO] AuxE.UVD.St_Ext
SIG AuxE.UVD.En
&
SIG AuxE.UVD.Blk AuxE.UVD.On
En AuxE.UVD.En
SET UA<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVG.StA
SET UB<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVG.StB
SET UC<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVG.StC
>=1
SIG AuxE.UVG.En
&
& AuxE.UVG.St
SIG AuxE.UVG.Blk
En AuxE.UVG.En
AuxE.UVG.On
SET UAB<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVS.StAB
SET UBC<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVS.StBC
SET UCA<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVS.StCA
>=1
SIG AuxE.UVS.En
&
& AuxE.UVS.St
SIG AuxE.UVS.Blk
En AuxE.UVS.En
AuxE.UVS.On
SIG Ua 3U0>[AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set] &

Calculate residual voltage AuxE.ROV.St
SIG Ub
3U0=Ua+Ub+Uc
SIG Uc
SIG AuxE.ROV.En
&
SIG AuxE.ROV.Blk AuxE.ROV.On
En AuxE.ROV.En

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
SIG AuxE.OCD.St_Ext
SIG AuxE.ROC1.St
>=1
SIG AuxE.ROC2.St
SIG AuxE.ROC3.St
>=1
SIG AuxE.OC1.St
>=1 AuxE.St
SIG AuxE.OC2.St
SIG AuxE.OC3.St
SIG AuxE.UVD.St_Ext >=1

>=1
SIG AuxE.UVG.St
SIG AuxE.UVS.St >=1
SIG AuxE.ROV.St
Figure 3.4-1 Logic diagram of auxiliary element
3.4.6 Settings
Table 3.4-2 Settings of auxiliary element

Extended time delay of current change
1 AuxE.OCD.t_DDO 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling current change
auxiliary element
2 AuxE.OCD.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Current setting of stage 1 residual
3 AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
current auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling stage 1 residual
4 AuxE.ROC1.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
5 AuxE.ROC2.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
0: disable
1: enable
7 AuxE.ROC3.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
0: disable
1: enable
9 AuxE.OC1.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In Current setting of stage 1 phase current

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling stage 1 phase
10 AuxE.OC1.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Current setting of stage 2 phase current
11 AuxE.OC2.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In
auxiliary element
0: disable
1: enable
Current setting of stage 3 phase current
13 AuxE.OC3.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In
auxiliary element
0: disable
1: enable
Voltage setting for voltage change
15 AuxE.UVD.U_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
auxiliary element
Extended time delay of voltage change
16 AuxE.UVD.t_DDO 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling voltage change
auxiliary element
17 AuxE.UVD.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Voltage setting for phase-to-ground
18 AuxE.UVG.U_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
under voltage auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling phase-to-ground
19 AuxE.UVG.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Voltage setting for phase-to-phase
20 AuxE.UVS.U_Set 0~Unn 0.001 V
Enabling/disabling phase-to-phase
21 AuxE.UVS.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Voltage setting for residual voltage
22 AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling residual voltage
auxiliary element
23 AuxE.ROV.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.5 Phase Overcurrent Protection

When a fault occurs in power system, usually the fault current would be very large and phase
overcurrent protection operates monitoring fault current is then adopted to avoid further damage to
protected equipment. For application on feeder-transformer circuits, second harmonic can also be
selected to block phase overcurrent protection to avoid the effect of inrush current on the
protection. Phase overcurrent protection is non-direction.
Phase overcurrent protection has following functions:
1. Two-stage phase overcurrent protection with independent logic, current and time delay
settings.
2. Second harmonic can be selected to block each stage of phase overcurrent protection.
3.5.3 Protection Principle
3.5.3.1 Overview
Phase overcurrent protection consists of following elements:
1. Overcurrent element: each stage is independent overcurrent element.
2. Harmonic blocking element: one harmonic blocking element shared by all overcurrent
elements and each phase overcurrent element can individually enable the output signal from
harmonic element as a blocking input.
3.5.3.2 Overcurrent Element
The operation criterion for each stage of overcurrent element is:
Ip> [50/51Px.I_Set] Equation 3.5-1
Where:
Ip is measured phase current.
[50/51Px.I_Set] is the current setting of stage x (x=1 or 2) of overcurrent element.
3.5.3.3 Harmonic Blocking Element
When phase overcurrent protection is used to protect feeder-transformer circuits, harmonic

blocking function can be selected for each stage of phase overcurrent element by configuring logic
setting [50/51Px.En_Hm2_Blk] (x=1 or 2) to prevent maloperation due to inrush current.
When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of any phase
current is greater than the setting [50/51P.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to block
stage x overcurrent element if corresponding logic setting [50/51Px.En_Hm2_Blk] is enabled.
Operation criterion:

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
Ip_2nd = 50/51P.K_Hm2 × Ip Equation 3.5-2
Where:
Ip_2nd is second harmonic of phase current.
Ip is fundamental component of phase current.
[50/51P.K_Hm2] is harmonic blocking coefficient.
If fundamental component of any phase current is lower than the minimum operating current
(0.1In), then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not
operate.
50/51Px
I3P 50/51Px.En
50/51Px.St
50/51Px.En1
50/51Px.StA
50/51Px.En2 50/51Px.StB
50/51Px.StC
50/51Px.Blk 50/51Px.Op
3.5.5 I/O Signals
Table 3.5-1 I/O signals of phase overcurrent protection

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary
2 50/51Px.En1
input or programmable logic etc.
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
3 50/51Px.En2
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
4 50/51Px.Blk
1 50/51Px.En Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is enabled
2 50/51Px.St Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts
3 50/51Px.StA Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase).
4 50/51Px.StB Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (B-Phase).
5 50/51Px.StC Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (C-Phase).
6 50/51Px.Op Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates
3.5.6 Logic
Logic diagram of phase overcurrent is shown in the following figure, including phase overcurrent

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
element and harmonic blocking element.
&
50/51Px.StA
SET Ia>[50/51Px.I_Set]
SET Ib>[50/51Px.I_Set] &

50/51Px.StB
SET Ic>[50/51Px.I_Set]
EN [50/51Px.En]
& &
SIG [50/51Px.En1] & 50/51Px.StC
&
SIG [50/51Px.En2] 50/51Px.En
SIG [50/51Px.Blk] 50/51Px.St

>=1
50/51Px.t_Op 0ms
50/51Px.Op
SIG I3P 2nd Hm Detect &
SET [50/51Px.En_Hm2_Blk]
Figure 3.5-1 Logic diagram of phase overcurrent protection
Where: x=1, 2
3.5.7 Settings
Table 3.5-2 Settings of phase overcurrent protection

Setting of second harmonic
1. 50/51P.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000 0.001 component for blocking phase
overcurrent elements
Current setting for stage 1 of phase
2. 50/51P1.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
overcurrent protection
Time delay for stage 1 of phase
3. 50/51P1.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
Enabling/disabling stage 1 of phase
4. 50/51P1.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling second harmonic
blocking for stage 1 of phase
5. 50/51P1.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1 overcurrent protection
0: disable
1: enable
Current setting for stage 2 of phase
6. 50/51P2.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
Time delay for stage 2 of phase
7. 50/51P2.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
Enabling/disabling stage 2 of phase
8. 50/51P2.En 0 or 1

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling second harmonic
blocking for stage 2 of phase
9. 50/51P2.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1 overcurrent protection
0: disable
1: enable
3.6 Earth Fault Protection

During normal operation of power system, there is trace residual current whereas a fault current
flows to earth will result in greater residual current. Therefore, residual current is adopted for the
calculation of earth fault protection. For application on feeder-transformer unit, second harmonic
also can be selected to block earth-fault protection to avoid the effect of sympathetic current on the
protection.
Earth-fault protection has following functions:
1. Two-stage earth-fault protection with independent logic, current and time delay settings.
2. Second harmonic can be selected to block each stage of earth fault protection.
3. Calculated residual current is used for the calculation of earth fault protection.
3.6.3.1 Overview
Earth fault protection consists of following two elements:
1. Overcurrent element: each stage equipped with one independent overcurrent element.
2. Harmonic blocking element: one harmonic blocking element shared by all overcurrent
elements and each overcurrent element can individually enable the output signal of harmonic
blocking element as a blocking input.
3.6.3.2 Earth Fault Element
The operation criterion for each stage of earth-fault protection is:
3I0 > [50/51Gx.3I0_Set] Equation 3.6-1
Where:
3I0 is the calculated residual current.
[50/51Gx.3I0_Set] is the current setting of stage x (x=1, 2) of earth-fault protection.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.6.3.3 Harmonic Blocking Element
In order to prevent effects of inrush current on earth-fault protection, harmonic blocking function
can be selected for each stage of earth-fault element by configuring logic setting
[50/51Gx.En_Hm2_Blk] (x=1, 2).
When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of residual

current is greater than the setting [50/51G.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to block
stage x of earth-fault protection if corresponding logic setting [50/51Gx.En_Hm2_Blk] is enabled
Operation criterion:
I0_2nd = 50/51G.K_Hm2 × I0 Equation 3.6-2
Where:
I0_2nd is second harmonic of residual current.
I0 is fundamental component of residual current.
[50/51G.K_Hm2] is harmonic blocking coefficient.
If fundamental component of residual current is lower than the minimum operating current (0.1In)
then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not operate.
50/51Gx
I3P 50/51Gx.En
50/51Gx.En1 50/51Gx.St
50/51Gx.En2 50/51Gx.Op
50/51Gx.Blk
3.6.5 I/O Signals
Table 3.6-1 I/O signals of earth fault protection

Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
2 50/51Gx.En1
Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
3 50/51Gx.En2
Stage x of earth fault protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
4 50/51Gx.Blk

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
1 50/51Gx.En Stage x of residual overcurrent protection is enabled.

2 50/51Gx.St Stage x of residual overcurrent protection starts.
3 50/51Gx.Op Stage x of residual overcurrent protection operates.
3.6.6 Logic
Logic diagram of earth-fault protection is shown in the following figure.
EN [50/51Gx.En]
&
SIG [50/51Gx.En1] &
50/51Gx.En
SIG [50/51Gx.En2]
SIG [50/51Gx.Blk]
& 50/51Gx.St
50/51Gx.t_Op 0ms
SET 3I0>[50/51Gx.3I0_Set] 50/51Gx.Op
SIG I3P 2nd Hm Detect &
SET [50/51Gx.En_Hm2_Blk]
Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of earth-fault protection
Where:
x=1, 2
3.6.7 Settings
Table 3.6-2 Settings of earth fault protection

Setting of second harmonic
1 50/51G.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000 0.001 component for blocking earth
fault elements
Current setting for stage 1 of
2 50/51G1.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
earth-fault protection
Time delay for stage 1 of
3 50/51G1.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
Enabling/disabling stage 1 of
4 50/51G1.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling second
harmonic blocking for stage 1 of
5 50/51G1.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1 earth-fault protection
0: disable
1: enable
Current setting for stage 2 of
6 50/51G2.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
7 50/51G2.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s Time delay for stage 2 of

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
Enabling/disabling stage 2 of
8 50/51G2.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling second
harmonic blocking for stage 2 of
9 50/51G2.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1 earth-fault protection
0: disable
1: enable
3.7 Dead Zone Protection

Generally, fault current is very large when multi-phase fault occurs between CT and circuit breaker
(i.e. dead zone) and it will have a greater impact on the system. Breaker failure protection can
operate after a longer time delay, in order to clear the dead zone fault quickly and improve the
system stability, dead zone protection with shorter time delay (compared with breaker failure
protection) is adopted.
For some wiring arrangement (for example, circuit breaker is located between CT and the line), if
fault occurs between CT and circuit breaker, line protection can operate to trip circuit breaker
quickly, but the fault have not been cleared since local circuit breaker is tripped. Here dead zone
protection is needed in order to trip relevant circuit breaker.
The criterion for dead zone protection is: when dead zone protection is enabled, binary input of
initiating dead zone protection is energized (by default, three-phase tripping signal is used to
initiate dead zone protection), if overcurrent element for dead zone protection operates, then
corresponding circuit breaker is tripped and three phases normally closed contact of the circuit
breaker are energized, dead zone protection will operate to trip adjacent circuit breaker after a
time delay.
50DZ
50DZ.En1 50DZ.En
50DZ.En2
50DZ.St
50DZ.Blk
50DZ.Op
50DZ.Init

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.7.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.7-1 I/O signals of dead zone protection

Dead zone protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
1 50DZ.En1
2 50DZ.En2
Dead zone protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 50DZ.Blk
programmable logic etc
4 50DZ.Init Initiation signal input of the dead zone protection.
1 50DZ.En Dead zone protection is enabled.
2 50DZ.St Dead zone protection starts.
3 50DZ.Op Dead zone protection operates.
3.7.6 Logic
The logic diagram of dead zone protection is shown as below.
EN [50DZ.En]
&
SIG 50DZ.En1 &
50DZ.En
SIG 50DZ.En2
SIG 50DZ.Blk
BI [52b_PhA]
&
BI [52b_PhB]
BI [52b_PhC]
50DZ.St
SET Ia > [50DZ.I_Set]
&
>=1 & [50DZ.t_Op] 0ms 50DZ.Op
SET Ib > [50DZ.I_Set]
SET Ic > [50DZ.I_Set]
SIG 50DZ.Init
Figure 3.7-1 Logic diagram of dead zone protection
3.7.7 Settings
Table 3.7-2 Settings of dead zone protection

Current setting for dead zone
protection. This setting shall ensure
1 50DZ.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
the protection being sensitive
enough if dead zone fault occurs.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
Time delay of dead zone

2 50DZ.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
protection.
Enabling/disabling dead zone
protection
3 50DZ.En 0 or 1 -
0: disable
1: enable
3.8 Breaker Failure Protection

Duplicated protection configurations are usually adopted for EHV power system, but the primary
equipment, circuit breaker, is not duplicated. Breaker failure protection is adopted to cater circuit
breaker tripping failure.
Breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers in case
of a tripping failure of the circuit breaker, and clears the fault as requested by the device. To utilize
the protection information of faulty equipment and the electrical information of failure circuit
breaker to constitute the criterion of breaker failure protection, it can ensure that the adjacent
circuit breakers of failure circuit breaker are tripped with a shorter time delay, so that the affected
area is minimized, and ensure stable operation of the entire power grid to prevent generators,
transformers and other components from seriously damaged.
The instantaneous re-tripping function, after receiving tripping signal from other device and the
corresponding phase overcurrent element operating, is available and provides phase-segregated
binary output contact, which can ensure the circuit breaker is still tripped in case the secondary
circuit between the device and the circuit breaker is abnormal, to avoid undesired tripping of
breaker failure protection and the expansion of the affected area. Instantaneous re-tripping
function does not block AR.
When both the phase-segregated tripping contact from line protection and the corresponding
phase overcurrent element operate, or both the three-phase tripping contact and any phase
overcurrent element operate, breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to
trip local circuit breaker after time delay of [50BF.t1_Op] and trip all adjacent circuit breakers after
time delay of [50BF.t2_Op].
When the protection element except undervoltage element within this device operates and issues
tripping signal, breaker failure protection will also be initiated.
Taking into account that the faulty current is too small for generator or transformer fault, the
sensitivity of phase current element may not meet the requirements, residual current criterion and
negative-sequence current criterion are provided in addition to the phase overcurrent element for
breaker failure protection initiated by input signal [50BF.ExTrp3P_GT] from generator and
transformer protection. They can be enabled or disabled by logic settings [50BF.En_3I0_3P] and
[50BF.En_I2_3P] respectively.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
For some special fault (for example, mechanical protection or overvoltage protection operating),
maybe faulty current is very small and current criterion of breaker failure protection is not met, in
order to make breaker failure protection can also operate under the above situation, an input
signal [50BF.ExTrp_WOI] is equipped to initiate breaker failure protection, once the input signal is
energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in addition to breaker
failure current check to trigger breaker failure timer. The device takes current as priority with CB
auxiliary contact (52b) as an option criterion for breaker failure check.
50BF
50BF.ExTrp3P_L 50BF.En
50BF.ExTrp3P_GT 50BF.Op_ReTrpA
50BF.ExTrp_WOI 50BF.Op_ReTrpB
50BF.ExTrpA 50BF.Op_ReTrpC
50BF.ExTrpB 50BF.Op_ReTrp3P
50BF.ExTrpC 50BF.Op_t1
50BF.En 50BF.Op_t2
50BF.Blk
3.8.4 I/O Signals
Table 3.8-1 I/O signals of breaker failure protection

1 50BF.ExTrp3P_L Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from line protection
Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from generator or transformer
2 50BF.ExTrp3P_GT
protection
3 50BF.ExTrpA Input signal of phase-A tripping contact from external device
4 50BF.ExTrpB Input signal of phase-B tripping contact from external device
5 50BF.ExTrpC Input signal of phase-C tripping contact from external device
Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from external device. Once it is
6 50BF.ExTrp_WOI energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in
addition to breaker failure current check to trigger breaker failure timers.
Breaker failure protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
7 50BF.En
Breaker failure protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
8 50BF.Blk
1 50BF.En Breaker failure protection is enabled
2 50BF.Op_ReTrpA Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker
3 50BF.Op_ReTrpB Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
4 50BF.Op_ReTrpC Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker

5 50BF.Op_ReTrp3P Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit breaker
6 50BF.Op_t1 Stage 1 breaker failure protection operates
3.8.5 Logic
SIG 50BF.En
&
EN [50BF.En] 50BF.On
SIG 50BF.Blk
SIG 50BF.On &
EN [50BF.En_ReTrp]
EN [50BF.En_3I0_1P] >=1
SET 3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]
SIG BFI_A >=1 & &

>=1 [50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms [50BF.Op_ReTrpA]
BI [50BF.ExTrpA]
SET IA>[50BF.I_Set]
SIG BFI_B >=1 & &

>=1 [50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms [50BF.Op_ReTrpB]
BI [50BF.ExTrpB]
SET IB>[50BF.I_Set]
SIG BFI_C >=1 & &

>=1 [50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms [50BF.Op_ReTrpC]
BI [50BF.ExTrpC] >=1
SET IC>[50BF.I_Set] >=1
SIG BFI_3P >=1

&
BI [50BF.ExTrp3P_L] & [50BF.Op_ReTrp3P]
>=1
BI [50BF.ExTrp3P_GT] >=1
BI [50BF.ExTrp_WOI]
&
EN [50BF.En_3I0_3P] &
>=1
>=1
SET 3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]
&
EN [50BF.En_I2_3P] &
SET I2>[50BF.I2_Set]
& [50BF.t1_Op] 0ms [50BF.Op_t1]
EN [50BF.En_CB_Ctrl] &
[50BF.t2_Op] 0ms [50BF.Op_t2]
BI [52b_PhA]
&
BI [52b_PhB]
BI [52b_PhC]
SIG 50BF.On
Figure 3.8-1 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection
Where:

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
BFI_A, BFI_B, BFI_C: Protection tripping signal of A-phase, B-phase and C-phase configured to
initiate breaker failure protection, please refer to Figure 3.12-1.
3.8.6 Settings
Table 3.8-2 Settings of breaker failure protection

Current setting of phase current
1 50BF.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
criterion for BFP
Current setting of zero-sequence
2 50BF.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
current criterion for BFP
Current setting of
3 50BF.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A negative-sequence current
criterion for BFP
4 50BF.t_ReTrp 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of re-tripping for BFP
5 50BF.t1_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of stage 1 for BFP
6 50BF.t2_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of stage 2 for BFP

Enabling/disabling breaker failure
protection
7 50BF.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling re-trip function
for BFP
8 50BF.En_ReTrp 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling zero-sequence
current criterion for BFP initiated by
9 50BF.En_3I0_1P 0 or 1 single-phase tripping contact
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling zero-sequence
current criterion for BFP initiated by
10 50BF.En_3I0_3P 0 or 1 three-phase tripping contact
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling
negative-sequence current criterion
for BFP initiated by three-phase
11 50BF.En_I2_3P 0 or 1
tripping contact
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling breaker failure
protection can be initiated by
normally closed contact of circuit
12 50BF.En_CB_Ctrl 0 or 1
breaker
0: disable
1: enable

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.9 Pole Discrepancy Protection

The pole discrepancy of circuit breaker may occur during operation of a breaker with segregated
operating gears for the three phases. The reason could be an interruption in the tripping/closing
circuits, or mechanical failure. A pole discrepancy can only be tolerated for a limited period. When
there is loading, zero-sequence or negative-sequence current will be generated in the power
system, which will result in overheat of the generator or the motor. With the load current increasing,
overcurrent elements based on residual current or negative-sequence current may operate. Pole
discrepancy protection is required to operate before the operation of these overcurrent elements.
Pole discrepancy protection determines three-phase breaker pole discrepancy condition by its
phase segregated CB auxiliary contacts. In order to improve the reliability of pole discrepancy
protection, the asymmetrical current component can be selected as addition criteria when needed.
62PD
62PD.En1 62PD.En
62PD.En2 62PD.St
62PD.Blk 62PD.Op
62PD.In_PD
3.9.4 I/O Signals
Table 3.9-1 I/O signals of pole discrepancy protection

Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
2 62PD.En1
Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
3 62PD.En2
Pole discrepancy protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
4 62PD.Blk
5 62PD.In_PD Pole discrepancy binary input
1 62PD.En Pole discrepancy protection is enabled
2 62PD.St Pole discrepancy protection starts
3 62PD.Op Pole discrepancy protection operates to trip

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.9.5 Logic
Pole discrepancy protection can be initiated following method.
Phase-segregated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device. When the state
of three phase-segregated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are inconsistent, pole discrepancy
protection will be started and initiate output after a time delay [62PD.t_Op].
Pole discrepancy protection can be blocked by external input signal [62PD.Blk]. In general, this
input signal is usually from the output of 1-pole AR initiation, so as to prevent pole discrepancy
protection from operation during 1-pole AR initiation.
SIG 62PD.En1
&
SIG 62PD.En2 &
62PD.En
EN [62PD.En]
BI [62PD.Blk] 62PD.St
&
BI [62PD.In_PD] [62PD.t_Op] 0ms 62PD.Op
EN [62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl] >=1
SET 3I0>[62PD.3I0_Set] >=1
SET I2>[62PD.I2_Set]
Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of pole discrepancy protection
Where:
3I0: Calculated residual current by vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic.
3.9.6 Settings
Table 3.9-2 Settings of pole discrepancy protection

Current setting of residual
1 62PD.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A current criterion for pole
discrepancy protection
Current setting of
negative-sequence current
2 62PD.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
criterion for pole discrepancy
protection
Time delay of pole
3 62PD.t_Op 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
Enabling/disabling pole
4 62PD.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling residual
5 62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl 0 or 1
current criterion and

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
negative-sequence current
criterion for pole discrepancy
protection
0: disable
1: enable
3.10 Synchrocheck
The purpose of synchrocheck is to ensure two systems are synchronism before they are going to
be connected.
When two asynchronous systems are connected together, due to phase difference between the
two systems, larger impact will be led to the system during closing. Thus auto-reclosing and
manual closing are applied with the synchrocheck to avoid this situation and maintain the system
stability. The synchrocheck includes synchronism check and dead charge check.
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares
them with the corresponding settings. The output is only given if all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.
The dead charge check function measures the amplitude of line voltage and bus voltage at both
sides of the circuit breaker, and then compare them with the live check setting [25.U_Lv] and the
dead check setting [25.U_Dd]. The output is only given when the measured quantities comply with
the criteria.
Synchrocheck in this device can be used for auto-reclosing and manual closing for both
single-breaker and dual-breakers. Details are described in the following sections.
When used for the synchrocheck of single-breaker, comparative relationship between reference
voltage (UL) and incoming voltage (UB) for synchronism is as follows.
UL
UB
Figure 3.10-1 Relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage
Figure 3.10-1 shows the characteristics of synchronism check element used for the auto-reclosing
if both line and busbar are live. The synchronism check element operates if voltage difference,

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
phase angle difference and frequency differency are all within their setting values.
1. The voltage difference is checked by the following equations.
[25.U_Lv]≤UB
[25.U_Lv] ≤UL
[25.U_Diff]≤|UB- UL|
2. The phase difference is checked by the following equations.
UB.UL cosØ≥0
UB.UL sin([25.phi_Diff])≥UB.UL sin([25.phi_Diff])
Where,
Ø is phase difference between UB and UL
3. The frequency difference is checked by the following equations.
|f(UB)-f(UL)|≤[25.f_Diff]
If frequency check is disabled (i.e. [25.En_fDiffChk] is set as “0”), a detected maximum slip cycle
can also be determined by the following equation based on phase difference setting and the
synchronism check time setting:
f =[25.phi_Diff]/(180×[25.t_SynChk])
Where:
f is slip cycle
If frequency check is enabled (i.e. [25.En_fDiffChk] is set as “1”), then [25.t_SynChk] can be set to
be a very small value (default value is 50ms).
3.10.2.1 Single Busbar Arrangement
Voltage selection function is not required for this busbar arrangement, the connection of the
voltage signals and respective VT MCB auxiliary contacts to the device is shown in the Figure
3.10-2 and Figure 3.10-3.
1. Three-phase bus voltage used for protection

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
VTS.En_LineVT=0 Bus
 Ua
UL1 Ub CB
Uc
MCB_VT_UL1
UB1
MCB_VT_UB1
Line
Figure 3.10-2 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement
2. Three-phase line voltage used for protection
VTS.En_LineVT=1 Bus
UB1 CB
MCB_VT_UB1
 Ua
UL1 Ub
Uc
MCB_VT_UL1 Line
Figure 3.10-3 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement
In the figures, the setting [VTS.En_LineVT] is used to determine protection voltage signals (Ua, Ub,
Uc) from line VT or bus VT according to the condition.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.10.2.2 Double Busbars Arrangement
Bus2
Bus1
B1D B2D
UB1
MCB_VT_UB1
UB2
MCB_VT_UB2
UB1D_Clsd
UB1D_Open  CB
UB2D_Clsd
UB2D_Open 
 Ua
UL1 Ub
Line
Uc
MCB_VT_UL1
Figure 3.10-4 Voltage connection for double busbars arrangement
For double busbars arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage signals from Bus 1 and Bus 2
for synchronizing are required. Line VT signal is taken as reference to check synchronizing with
the voltage after voltage selection function. Selection approach is as follows.
For the disconnector positions, the normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts of the
disconnector for bus 1 and bus 2 are required to determine the disconnector open and closed
positions. The voltage selection logic is as follows.
BI UB1D_Clsd &
UB1_Sel
BI UB1D_Open
Voltage
Selection Logic
BI UB2D_Clsd &
UB2_Sel
BI UB2D_Open
&
Invalid_Sel
UB1 UB
UB2
Figure 3.10-5 Voltage selection for double busbars arrangement

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
After acquiring the disconnector open and closed positions of double busbars, use the following
logic to acquire the feeder voltage of double busbars.
DS2 CLOSED DS2 OPEN

DS1 CLOSED Keep original value Voltage from Bus 1 VT (UB1_Sel=1)
DS1 OPEN Voltage from Bus 2 VT (UB2_Sel=1) Keep original value
DS1 is disconnector of Bus 1
DS2 is disconnector of Bus 2
If voltage selection is invalid (Invalid_Sel=1), keep original selection and without switchover.
3.10.2.3 One and A Half Breakers Arrangement
For one and a half breakers arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage signals among Line1
VT, Line2 VT and Bus 2 VT as reference voltage to check synchronizing with Bus 1 voltage signal
for closing breaker at Bus 1 side.
Bus1
UB1
MCB_VT_UB1
UB1D_Clsd
UB1D_Open  B1D
 Ua Line 1
UL1 Ub
Uc
MCB_VT_UL1
L1D
UL1D_Clsd
UL1D_Open  Line 2
UL2
MCB_VT_UL2
UL2D_Clsd
UL2D_Open 

L2D
UB2D_Clsd
UB2D_Open
UB2
MCB_VT_UB2
B2D
Bus2
Figure 3.10-6 Voltage connection for one and a half breakers arrangement

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
For the circuit breaker at bus side (take bus breaker of bus 1 as an example), the device acquires
the disconnector open and closed positions of two feeders and bus 2. The voltage selection logic
is as follows.
BI UL1D_Clsd &
UL1_Sel
BI UL1D_Open
&
BI UL2D_Clsd & UL2_Sel
BI UL2D_Open
&
BI UB2D_Clsd & UB2_Sel
BI UB2D_Open
&
Invalid_Sel
UL1 UL
UL2
UB2
Figure 3.10-7 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement
For the tie breaker, the device acquires the disconnector open and closed positions of two feeders
and two busbars. Either Line 1 VT or Bus 1 VT signal is selected as reference voltage to check
synchronizing with the selected voltage between Line 2 VT and Bus 2 VT. The voltage selection
logic is as follows.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
BI UL1D_Clsd &
UL1_Sel
BI UL1D_Open
&
BI UB1D_Open
&
UL1 UL
UB1
BI UL2D_Clsd &
UL2_Sel
BI UL2D_Open
&
BI UB2D_Open
>=1
& Invalid_Sel
UL2 UB
UB2
Figure 3.10-8 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement
When the voltage selection fails (including VT circuit failure and MCB failure), the device will issue
the corresponding failure signal. If the voltage selection is invalid (Invalid_Sel=1), keep original
selection and without switchover.
In order to simplify description, one of the two voltages used in the synchrocheck (synchronism check
and dead charge check) which obtained after voltage selection function is regarded as line voltage,
and another is bus voltage.
3.10.2.4 Synchronism Voltage Circuit Failure Supervision
If synchronism voltage from line VT or busbar VT is used for auto-reclosing with synchronism or
dead line or busbar check, the synchronism voltage is monitored.
If the circuit breaker is in closed state (52b of three phases are de-energized), but the synchronism
voltage is lower than the setting [25.U_Lv], it means that synchronism voltage circuit fails and an
alarm [25.Alm_VTS_UB] or [25.Alm_VTS_UL] will be issued with a time delay of 10s.
If auto-reclosing is disabled, or the logic setting [25.En_NoChk] is set as “1”, synchronism voltage
is not required and synchronism voltage circuit failure supervision will be disabled.
When synchronism voltage circuit failure is detected, function of synchronism check and dead
check in auto-reclosing logic will be disabled.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
After synchronism voltage reverted to normal condition, the alarm will be reset automatically with a
time delay of 10s.
3.10.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.10-1 I/O signals of synchrocheck

1 25.Blk_Chk Input signal of blocking synchrocheck function for AR.
Input signal of blocking synchronism check for AR. If the value is “1”, the output of
2 25.Blk_SynChk
synchronism check is “0”.
3 25.Blk_DdChk Input signal of blocking dead charge check for AR.
Input signal of starting synchronism check, usually it was starting signal of AR
4 25.Start_Chk
from auto-reclosing module.
5 25.Blk_VTS_UB VT circuit supervision (UB) is blocked
6 25.Blk_VTS_UL VT circuit supervision (UL) is blocked
7 25.MCB_VT_UB Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UB)
8 25.MCB_VT_UL Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UL)
1 UL1_Sel To select voltage of Line 1
3 UB1_Sel To select voltage of Bus 1
5 Invalid_Sel Voltage selection is invalid.
To indicate that frequency difference condition for synchronism check of AR is
6 25.Ok_fDiffChk
met, frequency difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.f_Diff].
To indicate that voltage difference condition for synchronism check of AR is met,
7 25.Ok_UDiffChk
voltage difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.U_Diff]
To indicate phase difference condition for synchronism check of AR is met, phase
8 25.Ok_phiDiffChk
difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.phi_Diff].
9 25.Ok_DdL_DdB Dead line and dead bus condition is met
10 25.Ok_DdL_LvB Dead line and live bus condition is met
11 25.Ok_LvL_DdB Live line and dead bus condition is met
12 25.Chk_LvL Line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]
13 25.Chk_DdL Line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]
14 25.Chk_LvB Bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]
15 25.Chk_DdB Bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]
16 25.Ok_DdChk To indicate that dead charge check condition of AR is met
17 25.Ok_SynChk To indicate that synchronism check condition of AR is met
18 25.Ok_Chk To indicate that synchrocheck condition of AR is met
19 25.Alm_VTS_UB Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UB)
20 25.Alm_VTS_UL Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UL)
21 f_Prot Frequency of the voltage used by protection calculation
22 f_Syn Frequency of the voltage used by synchrocheck

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
23 u_Diff Voltage difference for synchronism check

24 f_Diff Frequency difference for synchronism check
25 phi_Diff Phase difference for synchronism check
3.10.4 Logic
These logic diagrams give the introduction to the working principles of the synchronism check and
dead charge check.
3.10.4.1 Synchronism Check Logic
The frequency difference, voltage difference, and phase difference of voltages from both sides of
the circuit breaker are calculated in the device, they are used as input conditions of the
synchronism check.
When the synchronism check function is enabled and the voltages of both ends meets the
requirements of the voltage difference, phase difference, and frequency difference, and there is no
synchronism check blocking signal, it is regarded that the synchronism check conditions are met.
SIG 25.Blk_Chk >=1

&
SIG 25.Blk_SynChk
EN [25.En_SynChk]
SIG 25.Start_Chk
SIG UB>[25.U_Lv]
& &
SIG UL>[25.U_Lv] 50ms 0ms & [25.t_SynChk] 0ms 25.Ok_SynChk
SIG 25.Ok_UDiffChk
SIG 25.Ok_phiDiffChk
SIG 25.Ok_fDiffChk
Figure 3.10-9 Synchronism check
3.10.4.2 Dead Charge Check Logic
The dead charge check conditions have three types, namely, live-bus and dead-line check,
dead-bus and live-line check and dead-bus and dead-line check. The above three modes can be
enabled and disabled by the corresponding logic settings. The device can calculate the measured
bus voltage and line voltage at both sides of the circuit breaker and compare them with the
settings [25.U_Lv] and [25.U_Dd]. When the voltage is higher than [25.U_Lv], the bus/line is
regarded as live. When the voltage is lower than [25.U_Dd], the bus/line is regarded as dead.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
SIG 25.Blk_Chk >=1

&
SIG 25.Blk_DdChk &
>=1 [25.t_DdChk] 0ms 25.Ok_DdChk
SIG 25.Start_Chk
EN [25.En_DdL_DdB] &
25.Ok_DdL_DdB
EN [25.En_DdL_LvB] &
25.Ok_DdL_LvB
EN [25.En_LvL_DdB] &
25.Ok_LvL_DdB
SIG UL>[25.U_Lv]
SIG UL<[25.U_Dd]
SIG UB>[25.U_Lv]
SIG UB<[25.U_Dd]
SIG 25.Alm_VTS_UB >=1
SIG 25.Alm_VTS_UL
Figure 3.10-10 Dead charge check logic
3.10.4.3 Synchrocheck Logic
SIG 25.Ok_SynChk
>=1
EN 25.En_NoChk 25.Ok_Chk
SIG 25.Ok_DdChk
Figure 3.10-11 Synchrocheck logic
This device comprises two synchrocheck modules, correspond to circuit breaker 1 and circuit
breaker 2 respectively.
3.10.5 Settings
Table 3.10-2 Settings of synchrocheck

Voltage selecting mode of line.
0: A-phase voltage
1 25.Opt_Source_UL 0~5 1 1: B-phase voltage
2: C-phase voltage
3: AB-phase voltage

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
4: BC-phase voltage
5: CA-phase voltage
Voltage selecting mode of bus.
0: A-phase voltage
1: B-phase voltage
2 25.Opt_Source_UB 0~5 1 2: C-phase voltage
3: AB-phase voltage
4: BC-phase voltage
5: CA-phase voltage
3 25.U_Dd 0.05Un~0.8Un 0.001 V Voltage threshold of dead check
4 25.U_Lv 0.5Un~Un 0.001 V Voltage threshold of live check
Compensation coefficient for

5 25.K_Usyn 0.20-5.00
synchronous voltage
Phase difference limit of
6 25.phi_Diff 0~ 89 1 Deg
synchronism check for AR
Compensation for phase
7 25.phi_Comp 0~359 1 Deg difference between two
synchronous voltages
Frequency difference limit of
8 25.f_Diff 0.02~1.00 0.01 Hz
Voltage difference limit of
9 25.U_Diff 0.02Un~0.8Un V
Time delay to confirm dead check
10 25.t_DeadChk 0.010~25.000 s
condition
Time delay to confirm
11 25.t_SynChk 0.010~25.000 s
synchronism check condition
Enabling/disabling frequency
difference check
12 25.En_fDiffChk 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling synchronism
check
13 25.En_SynChk 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling dead line and
dead bus (DLDB) check
14 25.En_DdL_DdB 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling dead line and
live bus (DLLB) check
15 25.En_DdL_LvB 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
16 25.En_LvL_DdB 0 or 1 Enabling/disabling live line and

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
dead bus (LLDB) check

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling AR without any
check
17 25.En_NoChk 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
3.11 Automatic Reclosure

To maintain the integrity of the overall electrical transmission system, the device is installed on the
transmission system to isolate faulted segments during system disturbances. Faults caused by
lightning, wind, or tree branches could be transient in nature and may disappear once the circuit is
de-energized. According to statistics, for overhead transmission line, 80%~90% of the faults on
overhead lines are the transient faults. Auto-reclosing systems are installed to restore the faulted
section of the transmission system once the fault is extinguished (providing it is a transient fault).
For certain transmission systems, auto-reclosure is used to improve system stability by restoring
critical transmission paths as soon as possible.
Besides overhead lines, other equipment failure, such as cables, busbar, transformer fault and so
on, are generally permanent fault, and auto-reclosing is not initiated after faulty feeder is tripped.
For some mixed circuits, such as overhead line with a transformer unit, hybrid transmission lines,
etc., it is required to ensure that auto-reclosing is only initiated for faults overhead line section, or
make a choice according to the situation.
This auto-reclosing logic can be used with either integrated device or external device. When the
auto-reclosure is used with integrated device, the internal protection logic can initiate AR,
moreover, a tripping contact from external device can be connected to the device via opto-coupler
input to initiate integrated AR function.
When external auto-reclosure is used, the device can output some configurable output to initiate
external AR, such as, contact of initiating AR, phase-segregated tripping contact, single-phase
tripping contact, three-phase tripping contact and contact of blocking AR. According to
requirement, these contacts can be selectively connected to external auto-reclosure device to
initiate AR.
For phase-segregated circuit breaker, AR mode can be 1-pole AR for single-phase fault and
3-pole AR for multi-phase fault, or always 3-pole AR for any kinds of fault according to system
requirement. For persistent fault or multi-shot AR number preset value is reached, the device will
send final tripping command. The device will provide appropriate tripping command based on
faulty phase selection if adopting 1-pole AR.
AR can be enabled or disabled by logic setting or external signal via binary input. When AR is
enabled, the device will output contact [79.On], otherwise, output contact [79.Off]. After some

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
reclosing conditions, such as, CB position, CB pressure and so on, is satisfied, the device will
output contact [79.Ready].
According to requirement, the device can be set as one-shot or multi-shot AR. When adopting
multi-shot AR, the AR mode of first time reclosing can be set as 1-pole AR, 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole
AR. The rest AR mode is only 3-pole AR and its number is determined by the maximum 3-pole
reclosing number.
For one-shot AR or first reclosing of multi-shot AR, AR mode can be selected by logic setting
[79.En_1PAR], [79.En_3PAR] and [79.En_1P/3PAR] or external signal via binary inputs. When
3-pole or 1/3-pole AR mode is selected, the following three types of check modes can be selected:
dead charge check, synchronism check and no check.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
79
79.En 79.On
79.Blk 79.Off
79.Sel_1PAR 79.Close
79.Sel_3PAR 79.Ready
79.Sel_1P/3PAR 79.AR_Blkd
79.Trp 79.Active
79.Trp3P 79.Inprog
79.TrpA 79.Inprog_1P
79.TrpB 79.Inprog_3P
79.TrpC 79.Inprog_3PS1
79.Lockout 79.Inprog_3PS2
79.PLC_Lost 79.Inprog_3PS3
79.WaitMaster 79.Inprog_3PS4
79.CB_Healthy 79.WaitToSlave
79.Clr_Counter 79.Prem_Trp1P
79.Ok_Chk 79.Prem_Trp3P
79.Rcls_Status
79.Fail_Rcls
79.Succ_Rcls
79.Fail_Chk
79.Mode_1PAR
79.Mode_3PAR
79.Mode_1/3PAR
3.11.4 I/O Signals
Table 3.11-1 I/O signals of auto-reclosing

Binary input for enabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,
1 79.En
enabling AR will be controlled by the external signal via binary input
Binary input for disabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,
2 79.Blk
disabling AR will be controlled by the external input
3 79.Sel_1PAR Input signal for selecting 1-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
breaker
Input signal for selecting 3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit
4 79.Sel_3PAR
breaker
Input signal for selecting 1/3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit
5 79.Sel_1P/3PAR
breaker
6 79.Trp Input signal of single-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
7 79.Trp3P Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
8 79.TrpA Input signal of A-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
9 79.TrpB Input signal of B-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
10 79.TrpC Input signal of C-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with the
11 79.LockOut operating signals of definite-time protection, transformer protection
and busbar differential protection, etc.
12 79.PLC_Lost Input signal of indicating the alarm signal that signal channel is lost
Input signal of waiting for reclosing permissive signal from master
13 79.WaitMaster
AR (when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to
14 79.CB_Healthy
perform the close function
15 79.Clr_Counter Clear the reclosing counter
16 79.Ok_Chk Synchrocheck condition of AR is met
1 79.On Automatic reclosure is enabled
2 79.Off Automatic reclosure is disabled
3 79.Close Output of auto-reclosing signal
4 79.Ready Automatic reclosure have been ready for reclosing cycle
5 79.AR_Blkd Automatic reclosure is blocked
6 79.Active Automatic reclosing logic is actived
7 79.Inprog Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress
8 79.Inprog_1P The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress
9 79.Inprog_3P 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
10 79.Inprog_3PS1 First 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
11 79.Inprog_3PS2 Second 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
12 79.Inprog_3PS3 Third 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
13 79.Inprog_3PS4 Fourth 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will be sent to slave
14 79.WaitToSlave
(when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device
15 79.Prem_Trp1P
operates
Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device
16 79.Prem_Trp3P
operates
Automatic reclosure status (0: AR is ready; 1: AR is in progress; 2:
17 79.Rcls_Status
AR is successful)
18 79.Fail_Rcls Auto-reclosing fails

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
19 79.Succ_Rcls Auto-reclosing is successful

20 79.Fail_Chk Synchrocheck for AR fails
21 79.Mode_1PAR Output of 1-pole AR mode
23 79.Mode_1/3PAR Output of 1/3-pole AR mode
Automatic reclosure counter
24 79.N_Total_Rcls Total Recorded number of all reclosing attempts
25 79.N_Total_Rcls 1-pole Shot 1 Recorded number of first 1-pole reclosing attempts
26 79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 1 Recorded number of first 3-pole reclosing attempts
27 79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 2 Recorded number of second 3-pole reclosing attempts
28 79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 3 Recorded number of third 3-pole reclosing attempts
29 79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 4 Recorded number of fourth 3-pole reclosing attempts
3.11.5 Logic
3.11.5.1 AR Ready
For the first reclosing of multi-shot AR, AR mode can be 1-pole AR or 3-pole AR, however, the
selection is valid only to the first reclosing, after that it can only be 3-pole AR.
When logic setting [79.SetOpt] is set as “1”, AR mode is determined by logic settings. When logic
setting [79.SetOpt] is set as “0”, AR mode is determined by external signal via binary inputs.
An auto-reclosure must be ready to operate before performing reclosing. The output signal
[79.Ready] means that the auto-reclosure can perform at least one time of reclosing function, i.e.,
breaker open-close-open.
When the device is energized or after the settings are modified, the following conditions must be
met before the reclaim time begins:
1. AR function is enabled.
2. The circuit breaker is ready, such as, normal storage energy and no low pressure signal.
3. The duration of the circuit breaker in closed position before fault occurrence is not less than
the setting [79.t_CBClsd].
4. There is no block signal of auto-reclosing.
After the auto-reclosure operates, the auto-reclosure must reset, i.e., [79.Active]=0, in addition to
the above conditions for reclosing again.
The logic of AR ready is shown in Figure 3.11-1.
When there is a fault on an overhead line, the concerned circuit breakers will be tripped normally.
After fault is cleared, the tripping command will drop off immediately. In case the circuit breaker is
in failure, etc., and the tripping signal of the circuit breaker maintains and in excess of the time
delay [79.t_PersistTrp], AR will be blocked, as shown in the following figure.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
SIG Any tripping signal [79.t_PersistTrp] 0ms

>=1
SIG 79.LockOut 0ms [79.t_DDO_BlkAR]
SIG 1-pole AR Initiation [79.t_SecFault] 0ms

&
SIG Any tripping signal
En [79.En_PDF_Blk]
SIG 79.Sel_1PAR &
En [79.N_Rcls]=1
>=1
& 79.AR_Blkd
SIG Three phase trip
SIG Phase A open &
SIG Phase B open
& >=1
&
SIG Phase C open
SIG CB closed position [79.t_CBClsd] 100ms

& >=1
SIG 79.Active >=1
SIG Any tripping signal

&
BI [79.CB_Healthy] 0ms [79.t_CBReady] & 79.Ready
SIG 79.AR_Blkd >=1

>=1
SIG BlockAR &
SIG 79.Fail_Rcls
>=1
SIG 79.Fail_Chk
SIG Last shot is made
EN [79.En] &
EN [79.En_ExtCtrl]
>=1
79.On
&
SIG 79.En &
SIG 79.Blk
Figure 3.11-1 Logic diagram of AR ready
The input signal [79.CB_Healthy] must be energized before auto-reclosure gets ready. Because
most circuit breakers can finish one complete process: open-closed-open, it is necessary that
circuit breaker has enough energy before reclosing. When the time delay of AR is exhausted, AR

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
will be blocked if the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] is still not energized within time delay
[79.t_CBReady]. If this function is not required, the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] can be not to
configure, and its state will be thought as “1” by default.
When auto-reclosure is blocked, auto-reclosing failure, synchrocheck failure or last shot is

reached, or when the internal blocking condition of AR is met (such as, zone 3 of distance
protection operates, the device operates for multi-phase fault, three-phase fault and so on. These
flags of blocking AR have been configured in the device, additional configuration is not required.),
auto-reclosure will be discharged immediately and next auto-reclosing will be disabled.
When the input signal [79.LockOut] is energized, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately. The
blocking flag of AR will be also controlled by the internal blocking condition of AR. When the
blocking flag of AR is valid, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately.
When a fault occurs under pole disagreement condition, blocking AR can be enabled or disabled.
The time delay [79.t_SecFault] is used to discriminate another fault which begins after 1-pole AR
initiated. AR will be blocked if another fault happens after this time delay if the logic setting
[79.En_PDF_Blk] is set as “1”, and 3-pole AR will be initiated if [79.En_PDF_Blk] is set as “1”.
AR will be blocked immediately once the blocking condition of AR appears, but the blocking
condition of AR will drop off with a time delay [79.t_DDO_BlkAR] after blocking signal disappears.
When one-shot and 1-pole AR is enabled, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately if there are
binary inputs of multi-phase CB position is energized.
When any protection element operates to trip, the device will output a signal [79.Active] until AR
drop off (Reset Command). Any tripping signal can be from external protection device or internal
protection element.
AR function can be enabled by internal logic settings of AR mode or external signal via binary
inputs in addition to internal logic setting [79.En]. When logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl] is set as “1”,
AR enable are determined by external signal via binary inputs and logic settings. When logic
setting [79.En_ExtCtrl] set as “0”, AR enable are determined only by logic settings.
For one-shot reclosing, if 1-pole AR mode is selected, auto-reclosure will reset when there is
three-phase tripping signal or input signal of multi-phase open position.
3.11.5.2 AR Initiation
AR mode can be selected by external signal via binary inputs or internal logic settings. If the logic
setting [79.SetOpt] set as “1”, AR mode is determined by the internal logic settings. If the logic
settings [79.SetOpt] set as “0”, AR mode is determined by the external inputs.
1. AR initiated by tripping signal of line protection
AR can be initiated by tripping signal of line protection, and the tripping signal may be from internal
trip signal or external trip signal.
When selecting 1-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, line single-phase fault will trigger 1-pole AR. When AR
is ready to reclosing (“79.Ready”=1) and the single-phase tripping command is received, this
single-phase tripping command will be kept in the device, and 1-pole AR will be initiated after the

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
single-phase tripping command drops off. The single-phase tripping command kept in the device
will be cleared after the completion of auto-reclosing sequence (Reset Command). Its logic is
shown in Figure 3.11-2.
SIG Reset Command &

>=1
SIG Single-phase Trip
&
SIG 79.Ready
&
1-pole AR Initiation
SIG 79.Sel_1PAR >=1
SIG 79.Sel_1P/3PAR
Figure 3.11-2 Single-phase tripping initiating AR
When selecting 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, three-phase tripping will trigger 3-pole AR. When AR is
ready to reclosing (“79.Ready”=1) and the three-phase tripping command is received, this
three-phase tripping command will be kept in the device, and 3-pole AR will be initiated after the
three-phase tripping command drops off. The three-phase tripping command kept in the device will
be cleared after the completion of auto-reclosing sequence. (Reset Command) Its logic is shown
in Figure 3.11-3.
SIG Reset Command &

>=1
SIG Three-phase Trip
&
SIG 79.Ready
&
SIG 79.Sel_3PAR >=1
SIG 79.Sel_1P/3PAR
Figure 3.11-3 Three-phase tripping initiating AR
2. AR initiated by CB state
A logic setting [79.En_CBInit] is available for selection that AR is initiated by CB state. Under
normal conditions, when AR is ready to reclosing (“79.Ready”=1), AR will be initiated if circuit
breaker is open and corresponding phase current is nil. AR initiated by CB state can be divided
into initiating 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR, their logics are shown in Figure 3.11-4 and Figure 3.11-5
respectively. Usually normally closed contact of circuit breaker is used to reflect CB state.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
SIG Phase A open >=1
SIG Phase B open &

& &
&
SIG Phase C open 1-pole AR Initiation
EN [79.En_CBInit]
SIG 79.Ready
SIG 79.Sel_1PAR >=1
SIG 79.Sel_1P/3PAR
Figure 3.11-4 1-pole AR initiation
SIG Phase A open

&
SIG Phase B open
SIG Phase C open
EN [79.En_CBInit] & &

SIG 79.Ready
EN [79.Sel_1PAR] >=1
EN [79.Sel_1P/3PAR]
Figure 3.11-5 3-pole AR initiation
3.11.5.3 AR Reclosing
After AR is initiated, the device will output the initiating contact of AR. For 1-pole AR, in order to
prevent pole discrepancy protection from maloperation under pole discrepancy conditions, the
contact of “1-pole AR initiation” can be used to block pole discrepancy protection.
When the dead time delay of AR expires after AR is initiated, as for 1-pole AR, the result of
synchronism check will not be judged, and reclosing command will be output directly. As far as the
3-pole AR, if the synchronism check is enabled, the release of reclosing command shall be subject
to the result of synchronism check. After the dead time delay of AR expires, if the synchronism
check is still unsuccessful within the time delay [79.t_wait_Chk], the signal of synchronism check
failure (79.Fail_Syn) will be output and the AR will be blocked. If 3-pole AR with no-check is
enabled, the condition of synchronism check success (25.Ok_Chk) will always be established.
And the signal of synchronism check success (25.Ok_Chk) from the synchronism check logic can
be applied by auto-reclosing function inside the device or external auto-reclosure device.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
>=1
79.Inprog
SIG 1-pole AR Initiation [79.t_Dd_1PS1] 0ms
>=1
SIG 3-pole AR Initiation [79.t_Dd_3PS1] 0ms & AR Pulse
79.Inprog_3P
79.Inprog_1P &
[79.t_Wait_Chk] 0ms 79.Fail_Chk
SIG 25.Ok_Chk
Figure 3.11-6 One-shot AR
In case pilot protection adopting permissive scheme, when the communication channel is
abnormal, pilot protection will be disabled. In the process of channel abnormality, an internal fault
occurs on the transmission line, backup protection at both ends of line will operate to trip the circuit
breaker of each end. The operation time of backup protection at both ends of the line is possibly
non-accordant, whilst the time delay of AR needs to consider the arc-extinguishing and insulation
recovery ability for transient fault, so the time delay of AR shall be considered comprehensively
according to the operation time of the device at both ends. When the communication channel of
main protection is abnormal (input signal [79.PLC_Lost] is energized), and the logic setting
[79.En_AddDly] is set as “1”, then the dead time delay of AR shall be equal to the original dead
time delay of AR plus the extra time delay [79.t_AddDly], so as to ensure the recovery of insulation
intensity of fault point when reclosing after transient fault. This extra time delay [t_ExtendDly] is
only valid for the first shot AR.
>=1
SIG Any tripping signal &
BI [79.PLC_Lost]
&
SIG 79.Active
&
Extend AR time
EN [79.En_AddDly]
Figure 3.11-7 Extra time delay and blocking logic of AR
Reclosing pulse length may be set through the setting [79.t_DDO_AR]. For the circuit breaker
without anti-pump interlock, a logic setting [79.En_CutPulse] is available to control the reclosing
pulse. When this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during reclosing, the reclosing
pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto fault. After the reclosing
command is issued, AR will drop off with time delay [79.t_Reclaim], and can carry out next
reclosing.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
SIG AR Pulse 0ms 50ms >=1

79.AR_Out
[79.t_PW_AR]
[79.t_Reclaim] 0ms Reset Command
SIG Single-phase Trip >=1
&
SIG Three-phase Trip &
EN [79.En_CutPulse]
Figure 3.11-8 Reclosing output logic
The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the
reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of
the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing command is given.
3.11.5.4 Reclosing Failure and Success
For transient fault, the fault will be cleared after the device operates to trip. After the reclosing
command is issued, AR will drop off after time delay [79.t_Reclaim], and can carry out next
reclosing. When the reclosing is unsuccessful or the reclosing condition is not met after AR
initiated, the reclosing will be considered as unsuccessful, including the following cases.
1. For one-shot AR, if the tripping command is received again within reclaim time after the
reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.
2. For multi-shot AR, if the reclosing times are equal to the setting value of AR number and the
tripping command is received again after the last reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall
be considered as unsuccessful.
3. The logic setting [79.En_FailCheck] is available to judge whether the reclosing is successful
by CB state, when it is set as “1”. If CB is still in open position with a time delay [79.t_Fail] after
the reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful. For this case,
the device will issue a signal (79.Fail_Rcls) to indicate that the reclosing is unsuccessful, and
this signal will drop off after (Reset Command). AR will be blocked if the reclosing shall be
considered as unsuccessful.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
SIG Any tripping command &

>=1
SIG Last shot is made 0ms 200ms >=1
79.Fail_Rcls
SIG 79.Inprog &
SIG 79.AR_Blkd
>=1
SIG AR Pulse
&
[79.t_Fail] 0ms
SIG CB closed
&
EN [79.En_FailCheck]
&
0 [79.t_Fail] & 79.Succ_Rcls
Figure 3.11-9 Reclosing failure and success
After unsuccessful AR is confirmed, AR will be blocked. AR will not enter into the ready state
unless the circuit breaker position drops off , and can only begin to enter into the ready state again
after the circuit breaker is closed.
3.11.5.5 Reclosing Numbers Control
The device may be set up into one-shot or multi-shot AR. Through the setting [79.N_Rcls], the
maximum number of reclosing attempts may be set up to 4 times. Generally, only one-shot AR is
selected. Some corresponding settings may be hidden if one-shot AR is selected.
1. 1-pole AR
[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1-pole AR mode, 1-pole AR will be initiated
only for single-phase fault and respective faulty phase selected, otherwise, AR will be blocked. For
single-phase transient fault on the line, line protection device will operate to trip and 1-pole AR is
initiated. After the dead time delay for 1-pole AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse,
and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next
reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,
and the device will output the signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].
[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1-pole AR mode, the first
reclosing is 1-pole AR, and the subsequent reclosing can only be 3-pole AR. For single-phase
transient fault on the line, line protection device will operate to trip and then 1-pole AR is initiated.
After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and
then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next
reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,
and then 3-pole AR is initiated. At this time, the time delay applies the setting [79.t_Dd_3PS2].
After the time delay is expired, if the reclosing condition is met, the device will send reclosing pulse.
The sequence is repeated until the reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing
number [79.N_Rcls] is reached. If the first fault is multi-phase fault, the device operates to trip

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
three-phase and initiate 3-pole AR. At this time, the time delay applies the setting [79.t_Dd_3PS1].
For the possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 1-pole AR mode, please refer to Table 3.11-2.
2. 3-pole AR
[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 3-pole AR mode, line protection device will
operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be initiated. After the
dead time delay for 3-pole AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and then the
auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next reclosing. For
permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed, and the
device will output the signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].
[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 3-pole AR mode, line
protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be
initiated. After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing
pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the
next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is
performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off. After the time delay
for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse. The sequence is repeated until the
reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number [79.N_Rcls] is reached.
3. 1/3-pole AR
[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1/3-pole AR mode, line protection device
will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 1-pole AR will be initiated for
single-phase fault and 3-pole AR will be initiated for multi-phase fault. After respective dead time
delay for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop
off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the
device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed, and the device will output the
signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].
[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1/3-pole AR mode, line
protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and AR will be
initiated. After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing
pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the
next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is
performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off. After the time delay
for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse. The sequence is repeated until the
reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number [79.N_Rcls] is reached. For the
possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 1/3-pole AR mode, please refer to Table 3.11-2.
The table below shows the number of reclose attempts with respect to the settings and AR modes.
Table 3.11-2 Reclosing number
1-pole AR 3-pole AR 1/3-pole AR

Setting Value
N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR
1 1 0 0 1 1 1
2 1 1 0 2 1 2

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3 1 2 0 3 1 3
4 1 3 0 4 1 4
N-1AR: the reclosing number of 1-pole AR
N-3AR: the reclosing number of 3-pole AR
4. Coordination between dual auto-reclosures
Duplicated protection configurations are normally applied for UHV lines. If reclosing function is
integrated within line protections, the auto-reclosing function can be enabled in any or both of the
line protections without coordination.
If both sets of reclosing functions are enabled, when one of them first recloses onto a permanent
fault, the other will block the reclosing pulse according to the latest condition of the faulty phase.
For one-shot AR mode, if the current is detected in the faulty phase, AR will be blocked
immediately to prevent the circuit breaker from repetitive reclosing. For multi-shot AR mode, if the
current is detected in the faulty phase, the current reclosing pulse will be blocked and go into the
next reclosing pulse logic automatically. If the maximum permitted reclosing number [79.N_Rcls] is
reached, the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim].
For one-shot or multi-shot AR, there is a corresponding reclosing counter at each stage. After
reclosing pulse is sent, the corresponding reclosing counter will plus 1 and the reclosing counter
may be cleared by the submenu “Clear Counter”. If the circuit breaker is reclosed by other
devices during AR initiation, the auto-reclosure will go into the next reclosing pulse logic.
3.11.5.6 AR Time Sequence Diagram
The following two examples indicate typical time sequence of AR process for transient fault and
permanent fault respectively.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
Signal
Fault
Trip
CB 52b
Open
79.t_Reclaim [79.t_Reclaim]
79.Active
79.Inprog [79.t_Dd_1PS1]
79.Inprog_1P [79.t_Dd_1PS1]
79.Ok_Chk
AR Out [79.t_PW_AR]
79.Perm_Trp3P
79.Fail_Rcls
Time
Figure 3.11-10 Single-phase transient fault
Signal
Fault
Trip
Open Open
52b
79.t_Reclaim [79.t_Reclaim]
79.Active
79.Inprog
79.Inprog_1P [79.t_Dd_1PS1]
79.Inprog_3PS2 [79.t_Dd_3PS2]
79.Ok_Chk
AR Out [79.t_PW_AR] [79.t_PW_AR]
79.Perm_Trp3P
79.Fail_Rcls 200ms
Time
Figure 3.11-11 Single-phase permanent fault ([79.N_Rcls]=2)

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.11.6 Settings
Table 3.11-3 Settings of auto-reclosing
1 79.N_Rcls 1~4 1 Maximum number of reclosing attempts
2 79.t_Dd_1PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Dead time of first shot 1-pole reclosing
3 79.t_Dd_3PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Dead time of first shot 3-pole reclosing
Dead time of second shot 3-pole

4 79.t_Dd_3PS2 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
5 79.t_Dd_3PS3 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Dead time of third shot 3-pole reclosing
Dead time of fourth shot 3-pole

6 79.t_Dd_3PS4 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
Time delay of circuit breaker in closed
7 79.t_CBClsd 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
position before reclosing
Time delay to wait for CB healthy, and
begin to timing when the input signal
8 79.t_CBReady 0.000~600.000 0.001 s [79.CB_Healthy] is de-energized and if
it is not energized within this time delay,
AR will be blocked.
Maximum wait time for synchronism
9 79.t_Wait_Chk 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
check
Time delay allow for CB status change
10 79.t_Fail 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
to conform reclosing successful
11 79.t_DDO_AR 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Pulse width of AR closing signal
12 79.t_Reclaim 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Reclaim time of AR
Time delay of excessive trip signal to

13 79.t_PersistTrp 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
block auto-reclosing
Drop-off time delay of blocking AR,
when blocking signal for AR
14 79.t_DDO_BlkAR 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
disappears, AR blocking condition
drops off after this time delay
15 79.t_AddDly 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Additional time delay for auto-reclosing
Maximum wait time for reclosing

16 79.t_WaitMaster 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
permissive signal from master AR
Time delay of discriminating another
fault, and begin to times after 1-pole AR
initiated, 3-pole AR will be initiated if
17 79.t_SecFault 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
another fault happens during this time
delay. AR will be blocked if another fault
happens after that.
18 79.En_PDF_Blk 0 or 1 Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
blocked when a fault occurs under pole

disagreement condition
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing with
an additional dead time delay
19 79.En_AddDly 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling adjust the length of
reclosing pulse
20 79.En_CutPulse 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling confirm whether AR
is successful by checking CB state
21 79.En_FailCheck 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing
22 79.En 0 or 1 0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling AR by external input
signal besides logic setting [79.En]
23 79.En_ExtCtrl 0 or 1
0: only logic setting
1: logic setting and external input signal
Enabling/disabling AR be initiated by
open state of circuit breaker
24 79.En_CBInit 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Option of AR priority
0：None (single-breaker arrangement)
1：High (master AR of multi-breaker
25 79.Opt_Priority 0, 1 or 2
arrangement)
2 ： Low (slave AR of multi-breaker
arrangement)
Control option of AR mode
1: select AR mode by internal logic
26 79.SetOpt 0 or 1 settings
0: select AR mode by external input
signals
Enabling/disabling 1-pole AR mode
27 79.En_1PAR 0 or 1 0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling 3-pole AR mode
28 79.En_3PAR 0 or 1 0: disable
1: enable

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
Enabling/disabling 1/3-pole AR mode

29 79.En_1P/3PAR 0 or 1 0: disable
1: enable
3.12 Trip Logic

3.12.1 Application
For any enabled protection tripping elements, their operation signal will convert to appropriate
tripping signals through trip logics and then trigger output contacts by configuration.
This module gathers signals from phase selection and protection tripping elements and then
converts the operation signal from protection tripping elements to appropriate tripping signals. The
device can implement phase-segregated tripping or three-phase tripping, and may output the
contact of blocking AR and the contact of initiating breaker failure protection.
3.12.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.12-1 I/O signals of trip logic

1 TrpOut.En Trip enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.
2 TrpOut.Blk Trip blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.
Protection operation elements, includes phase overcurrent protection, earth fault
3 Op_CBProt protection, pole discrepancy protection, dead zone protection, breaker failure
protection and etc.
Input signal of permitting three-phase tripping
4 PrepTrp3P When this signal is valid, three-phase tripping will be adopted for any kind of
faults.
1 TrpOut.En Trip output is enabled
2 TrpA Tripping phase-A circuit breaker
3 TrpB Tripping phase-B circuit breaker
4 TrpC Tripping phase-C circuit breaker
5 Trp Tripping any phase of circuit breaker
6 Trp3P Tripping three-phase circuit breaker
Protection tripping signal of A-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be
7 BFI_A
reset immediately after tripping signal drops off.
Protection tripping signal of B-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be
8 BFI_B
Protection tripping signal of C-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be
9 BFI_C

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.12.4 Logic
0 t_Dwell_Trp
&
>=1
50BF.Op_ReTrpA t_Dwell_Trp 0
SIG & TrpA
SIG Ia>0.06In
0 t_Dwell_Trp
&
>=1
50BF.Op_ReTrpB t_Dwell_Trp 0
SIG & TrpB
SIG Ib>0.06In
0 t_Dwell_Trp
&
>=1
50BF.Op_ReTrpC t_Dwell_Trp 0
SIG & TrpC
SIG Ic>0.06In
>=1
>=1 Trp
0 t_Dwell_Trp
&
&
SIG Prep3PTrp >=1 >=1

t_Dwell_Trp 0
& Trp3P
SIG Op_CBProt
SIG Max(Ia,Ib,Ic)>0.06In
SIG TrpA &

BFI_A
SIG TrpB &

BFI_B
SIG TrpC &

BFI_C
SIG Trp &

SIG 50/51Gx.Op >=1 BFI
SIG 50/51Px.Op
Figure 3.12-1 Simplified trip logic
All operation elements (except for re-tripping element) are 3 phase tripping elements.

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.12.5 Settings
Table 3.12-2 Settings of trip logic

The dwell time of tripping command, empirical
value is 0.04
1 t_Dwell_Trp 0.000~10.000 0.001 s The tripping contact shall drop off under
conditions of no current or protection tripping
element drop-off.
3.13 VT Circuit Supervision

The purpose of VT circuit supervision is to detect whether VT circuit is normal. Some protection
functions should be disabled when VT circuit fails.
VT circuit failure can be caused by many reasons, such as fuse blown due to short-circuit fault,
poor contact of VT circuit, VT maintenance and so on. The device can detect them and issue an
alarm signal to block relevant protection functions. However, the alarm of VT circuit failure should
not be issued when the following cases happen.
1. Line VT is used as protection VT and the protected line is out of service.
2. Only current protection functions are enabled and VT is not connected to the device.
VT circuit supervision can detect failure of single-phase, two-phase and three-phase on protection
VT. Under normal condition, the device continuously supervises input voltage from VT, VT circuit
failure signal will be activated if residual voltage exceeds the threshold value or positive-sequence
voltage is lower than the threshold value. If the device is under pickup state due to system fault or
other abnormality, VT circuit supervision will be disabled.
Under normal conditions, the device detect residual voltage greater than 8% of Unn to determine
single-phase or two-phase VT circuit failure, and detect three times positive-sequence voltage less
than Unn to determine three-phase VT circuit failure. Upon detecting abnormality on VT circuit, an
alarm will comes up after a time delay of [VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of
[VTS.t_DDO] after VT circuit restored to normal.
VT (secondary circuit) MCB auxiliary contact as a binary input can be connected to the binary
input circuit of the device. If MCB is open (i.e. [VTS.MCB_VT] is energized), the device will
consider the VT circuit is not in a good condition and issues an alarm without a time delay. If the
auxiliary contact is not connected to the device, VT circuit supervision will be issued with time
delay as mentioned in previous paragraph.
When VT is not connected into the device, the alarm will be not issued if the logic setting
[VTS.En_Out_VT] is set as “1”. However, the alarm is still issued if the binary input [VTS.MCB_VT]

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
is energized, no matter that the logic setting [VTS.En_Out_VT] is set as “1” or “0”.
When VT neutral point fails, third harmonic of residual voltage is comparatively large. If third
harmonic amplitude of residual voltage is larger than 0.2Unn and without operation of fault
detector element, VT neutral point failure alarm signal [VTNS.Alm] will be issued after a time delay
of [VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of [VTS.t_DDO] after three phases voltage restored
to normal.
VTS VTNS
VTS.En VTS.Alm VTNS.En VTNS.Alm
VTS.Blk VTNS.Blk
VTS.MCB_VT
3.13.4 I/O Signals
Table 3.13-1 I/O signals of VT circuit supervision

VT supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable
1 VTS.En
logic etc.
VT supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable
2 VTS.Blk
logic etc.
VT neutral point supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 VTNS.En
VT neutral point supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
4 VTNS.Blk
5 VTS.MCB_VT Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact
1 VTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT circuit fails
2 VTNS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT neutral point fails

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.13.5 Logic
SIG 3U0>0.08Unn
>=1
SIG 3U1<Unn &
>=1
EN [VTS.En_LineVT] &
SIG 52b_3P
&
>=1
EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]
BI [VTS.MCB_VT]
&
EN [VTS.En] VTS.t_DPU VTS.t_DDO VTS.Alm
&
SIG [VTS.En]
SIG [VTS.Blk]
Figure 3.13-1 Logic diagram of VT circuit supervision
OTH U03>0.2Unn &

&
VTS.t_DPU VTS.t_DDO VTNS.Al
EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]
m
EN [VTS.En]
&
SIG [VTNS.En]
SIG [VTNS.Blk]
Figure 3.13-2 Logic diagram of VT neutral point supervision
Unn: rated phase-to-phase voltage
U03: third harmonic amplitude of neutral point residual voltage
3.13.6 Settings
Table 3.13-2 Settings of VT circuit supervision

1 VTS.t_DPU 0.200~100.000 0.001 s Pick-up time delay of VT circuit supervision
Drop-off time delay of VT circuit
2 VTS.t_DDO 0.200~100.000 0.001 s
supervision
No voltage used for protection calculation
1: enable
0: disable
3 VTS.En_Out_VT 0 or 1
In general, when VT is not connected to the
device, this logic setting should be set as
“1”
Voltage selection for protection calculation
from busbar VT or line VT
4 VTS.En_LineVT 0 or 1
1: line VT
0: busbar VT

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
Alarm function of VT circuit supervision

5 VTS.En 0 or 1 1: enable
0: disable
3.14 CT Circuit Supervision

3.14.1 Application
The purpose of the CT circuit supervision is to detect any abnormality on CT secondary circuit.
Under normal conditions, CT secondary signal is continuously supervised by detecting the

residual current and voltage. If residual current is larger than 10%In whereas residual voltage is
less than 3V, an error in CT circuit is considered, the concerned protection functions are blocked
and an alarm is issued with a time delay of 10s and drop off with a time delay of 10s after CT
circuit is restored to normal condition.
CTS
CTS.En CTS.Alm
CTS.Blk
3.14.4 I/O Signals
Table 3.14-1 I/O signals of CT circuit supervision

1 U3P Three-phase voltage input
CT circuit supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 CTS.En
CT circuit supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
4 CTS.Blk
1 CTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate CT circuit fails

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory
3.14.5 Logic
OTH 3I0>0.1In &

10s 10s CTS.Alm
OTH 3U0<3V
Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of CT circuit failure

Date: 2013-02-27
3 Operation Theory

Date: 2013-02-27
4 Supervision
4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Supervision Alarms ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Relay Self-supervision.................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1 Relay Hardware Monitoring ................................................................................................. 4-6
4.3.2 Fault Detector Monitoring .................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.3 Check Setting ...................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.4 AC Input Monitoring ........................................................................................ 4-7

4.4.1 Voltage/Current Drift Monitoring and Auto-adjustment ........................................................ 4-7
4.4.2 Sampling Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 4-7
4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring ........................................................................ 4-7

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision ......................................................................................... 4-7
4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision ................................................................................................. 4-7
4.6 GOOSE Alarm .................................................................................................. 4-7
List of Tables
Table 4.2-1 Alarm description .................................................................................................... 4-1
Table 4.2-2 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 4-4

Date: 2013-02-26
4 Supervision

Date: 2013-02-26
4 Supervision
4.1 Overview
Protection system is in quiescent state under normal conditions, and it is required to respond
promptly for faults which occurr on power system. When the device is in energizing process before
the LED “HEALTHY” is on, the device need to be checked to ensure no abnormality. Therefore,
the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup
and during normal operation, plays an important role.
The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this
automatic supervision function of the protection system.
In case a defect is detected during initialization when DC power supply is provided to the device,
the device will be blocked with indication and alarm of relay out of service. It is suggested a trial
recovery of the device by re-energization. Please contact supplier if the device is still failure.
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed by a LCD message, LED
indication and alarm contact outputs. The failure alarm is also recorded in event recording report
and can be printed If required.
4.2 Supervision Alarms

Hardware circuit and operation status of the device are self-supervised continuously. If any
abnormal condition is detected, information or report will be displayed and a corresponding alarm
will be issued.
A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions
can still work. However, if severe hardware failure or abnormality, such as PWR module failure,
DC converter failure and so on, are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and the LED
“HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking output contacts BO_FAIL will be given. The
protective device then can not work normally and maintenance is required to eliminate the failure.
All the alarm signals and the corresponding handling suggestions are listed below.
NOTE!
If the protective device is blocked or alarm signal is sent during operation, please do find
out its reason with the help of self-diagnostic record. If the reason can not be found at site,
please notify the factory NR. Please do not simply press button “TARGET RESET” on the
protection panel or re-energize on the device.
Table 4.2-1 Alarm description
Blocking
No. Item Description
Device
Fail Signals
The device fails.
1 Fail_Device This signal will be pick up if any fail signal picks up Blocked
and it will drop off when all fail signals drop off.

Date: 2013-02-26
4 Supervision
Set value of any setting is out of scope.

This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be
2 Fail_Setting_OvRange Blocked
latched unless the recommended handling
suggestion is adopted.
Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in
3 Fail_BoardConfig modules and the designing drawing of an Blocked
applied-specific project.
After config file is updated, settings of the file and
settings saved on the device are not matched.
4 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be Blocked
Error is found during checking memory data.
5 Fail_Memory Blocked
Error is found during checking settings.
6 Fail_Settings Blocked
DSP chip is damaged.
7 Fail_DSP Blocked
Communication between two DSP chips is
abnormal
8 Fail_DSP_Comm Blocked
This signal will pick up instantaneously and will
drop off instantaneously.
Software configuation is incorrect.
9 Fail_Config Blocked
AC current and voltage samplings are abnormal.
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 200ms
10 Fail_Sample Blocked
and will be latched unless the recommended
handling suggestion is adopted.
For DSP plug-in module for measurement and
11 MCBrd.Fail_Sample control in slot 06, AC current and voltage samplings Blocked
are abnormal
Error is found during checking the settings of DSP
12 MCBrd.Fail_Settings plug-in module for measurement and control in slot Blocked
06.
Alarm Signals
13 Alm_Device The device is abnormal. Unblocked

Date: 2013-02-26
4 Supervision
This signal will be pick up if any alarm signal picks

up and it will drop off when all alarm signals drop
off.
14 Alm_Insuf_Memory The memory of MON plug-in module is insufficient. Unblocked
The device is in the communication test mode.
15 Alm_CommTest This signal will pick up instantaneously and will Unblocked
The error is found during MON module checking
settings of device.
16 Alm_Settings_MON This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and Unblocked
will be latched unless re-powering or rebooting the
device.
The error is found during checking the version of
software downloaded to the device.
17 Alm_Version Unblocked
The active group set by settings in device and that
set by binary input are not matched.
18 Alm_BI_SettingGrp Unblocked
Data frame is abnormal between two DSP
modules.
19 Alm_DSP_Frame Unblocked
The power supply of BI plug-in module in slot xx is
abnormal.
20 Bxx.Alm_OptoDC Unblocked
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and
will drop off with a time delay of 10s.
Fault detector element operates for longer than
50s.
21 Alm_Pkp_FD Unblocked
Neutral current fault detector element operates for
longer than 10s.
22 Alm_Pkp_I0 Unblocked
Protection VT circuit fails.
This signal will pick up with a time delay of
23 VTS.Alm Unblocked
[VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of
[VTS.t_DDO].
Protection VT circuit of neutral point fails.
This signal will pick up with a time delay of
24 VTNS.Alm Unblocked
[VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of
[VTS.t_DDO].

Date: 2013-02-26
4 Supervision
CT circuit of corresponding circuit breaker fails.

25 CTS.Alm This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and Unblocked
The auxiliary normally closed contact (52b) of
corresponding circuit breaker is abnormal.
26 Alm_52b Unblocked
The device is in maintenance state.
27 BI_Maintenance This signal will pick up with a time delay of 150ms Unblocked
and will drop off with a time delay of 150ms.
28 Alm_TimeSync Time synchronization abnormality alarm. Unblocked
Frequency of the system is higher than 65Hz or

lower than 45Hz.
29 Alm_Freq Unblocked
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 100ms
and will drop off with a time delay of 10s.
Spare alarm signals
30 Alm_Sparexx (xx=01~08) The time delay of pickup and dropoff for these Unblocked
alarm signals can be set by PCS-Explorer.
Protection Element Alarm Signals
Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UB)
31 25.Alm_VTS_UB This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s Unblocked
Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UL)
32 25.Alm_VTS_UL This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s Unblocked
33 79.Fail_Rcls Auto-reclosing fails. Unblocked
34 79.Fail_Chk Synchrocheck for AR fails. Unblocked
Table 4.2-2 Troubleshooting
No. Item Handling suggestion

Fail Signals
The signal is issued with other specific fail signals, and please refer to the
1 Fail_Device
handling suggestion other specific alarm signals.
Please reset setting values according to the range described in the instruction
2 Fail_Setting_OvRange manual, then re-power or reboot the device and the device will restore to
normal operation state.
1. Go to the menu “Information→Borad Info”, check the abnormality
information.
3 Fail_BoardConfig 2. For the abnormality board, if the board is not used, then remove, and if
the board is used, then check whether the board is installed properly and work
normally.
Please check the settings mentioned in the prompt message on the LCD, and
4 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd
go to the menu “Settings” and select “Confirm_Settings” item to comfirm

Date: 2013-02-26
4 Supervision
settings. Then, the device will restore to normal operation stage.

5 Fail_Memory Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
6 Fail_Settings Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
Chips are damaged and please inform the manufacture or the agent replacing
7 Fail_DSP
the module.
8 Fail_DSP_Comm Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
Please inform configuration engineers to check and confirm visualization
9 Fail_Config
functions of the device
1. Please make the device out of service.
2. Then check if the analog input modules and wiring connectors
10 Fail_Sample connected to those modules are installed at the position.
3. Re-power the device and the device will restore to normal operation
state.
1. Please make the device out of service.
2. Then check if analog input modules and wiring connectors connected to
11 MCBrd.Fail_Sample
those modules are installed at the position.
3. Re-power the device and the device will restore to normal operation state.
12 MCBrd.Fail_Settings Please inform the manufacturer or the agent for repair.
Alarm Signals
The signal is issued with other specific alarm signals, and please refer to the
13 Alm_Device
handling suggestion other specific alarm signals.
14 Alm_Insuf_Memory Please replace MON plug-in module.
No special treatment is needed, and disable the communication test function
15 Alm_CommTest
after the completion of the test.
16 Alm_Settings_MON Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
Users may pay no attention to the alarm signal in the project commissioning
stage, but it is needed to download the latest package file (including correct
version checksum file) provided by R&D engineer to make the alarm signal
17 Alm_Version
disappear. Then users get the correct software version. It is not allowed that
the alarm signal is issued on the device already has been put into service. the
devices having being put into service so that the alarm signal disappears.
Please check the value of setting [Active_Grp] and binary input of indiating
active group, and make them matched. Then the “ALARM” LED will be
18 Alm_BI_SettingGrp
extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the
device will restore to normal operation state.
19 Alm_DSP_Frame Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
1. check whether the binary input module is connected to the power supply.
2. check whether the voltage of power supply is in the required range.
20 Bxx.Alm_OptoDC 3. After the voltage for binary input module restores to normal range, the
“ALARM” LED will be extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will
disappear and the device will restore to normal operation state.
Please check secondary values and protection settings. If settings are not set
21 Alm_Pkp_FD reasonable to make fault detectors pick up, please reset settings, and then
the alarm message will disappear and the device will restore to normal

Date: 2013-02-26
4 Supervision
operation state.
Please check secondary values and protection settings. If settings are not set
reasonable to make fault detectors pick up, please reset settings, and then
22 Alm_Pkp_I0
the alarm message will disappear and the device will restore to normal
operation state.
Please check the corresponding VT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is
23 VTS.Alm
eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.
Please check the corresponding VT secondary circuit of neutral point. After
24 VTNS.Alm
the abnormality is eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.
Please check the corresponding CT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is
25 CTS.Alm
eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.
Please check the auxiliary contact of CB. After the abnormality is eliminated,
26 Alm_52b
the device returns to normal operation state.
After maintenance is finished, please de-energized the binary input
27 BI_Maintenance [BI_Maintenance] and then the alarm will disappear and the device restore to
normal operation state.
1. check whether the selected clock synchronization mode matches the

clock synchronization source;
2. check whether the wiring connection between the device and the clock
synchronization source is correct
28 Alm_TimeSync 3. check whether the setting for selecting clock synchronization (i.e.
[Opt_TimeSync]) is set correctly. If there is no clock synchronization, please
set the setting [Opt_TimeSync] as ”No TimeSync”.
4. After the abnormality is removed, the “ALARM” LED will be extinguished

and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the device will
restore to normal operation state.
29 Alm_Freq Adjust the system operating mode
Alm_Sparexx Find the reason according to specific problem. (These signals are
30
(xx=01~08) user-defined.)
4.3 Relay Self-supervision
4.3.1 Relay Hardware Monitoring

All chips on DSP module are monitored to ensure whether they are damaged or having errors. If
any one of them is detected damaged or having error, the alarm signal [Fail_DSP] is issued with
the device being blocked.
4.3.2 Fault Detector Monitoring

When neutral current fault detector picks up and lasts for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm
[Alm_Pkp_I0] will be issued without the device blocked.
When any fault detector picks up for longer than 50s, an alarm will be issued [Alm_Pkp_FD]

Date: 2013-02-26
4 Supervision
without the device blocked.
4.3.3 Check Setting

This relay has 10 setting groups, only one setting group could be activiated (is active) at a time.
The settings of active setting group are checked to ensure they are reasonable. If settings are
checked to be unreasonable or out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal will be issued,
and the device is also blocked.
4.4 AC Input Monitoring

4.4.1 Voltage/Current Drift Monitoring and Auto-adjustment
Zero point of voltage and current may drift due to variation of temperature or other environment
factors. The device continually traces the drift and adjust it to normal value automatically.
4.4.2 Sampling Monitoring

AC current and voltage samplings of protection DSP and fault detector DSP are monitored and if
the samples of protection DSP and fault detector DSP are detected to be wrong or inconsistent
between them, the alarm signal [Fail_Sample] will be issued and the device will be blocked.
4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision
Positive power supply of opto-coupler is continually monitored. If an error or damage has occurred,
an alarm [Bxx.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued.
4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision

If 52b of three phases are energized ,which indicates circuit breaker is open and there is no
current detected in the line, the line will be considered to be out of service.
If 52b of three phases are energized that indicates circuit breaker is open but current is still
detected in the line (the measured current is greater than a settable threshold value) or
three-phase circuit breaker is in pole disagreement condition, an alarm signal [Alm_52b] will be
issued after 10s.
4.6 GOOSE Alarm
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network storm occurring on the
1 GAlm_AStorm_SL
network A.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network storm occurring on the
2 GAlm_BStorm_SL
network B.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is an error in the GOOSE

3 GAlm_CfgFile_SL
configuration file
4 Namexx.GAlm_ADisc_SL_xx GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network A for Namexx is disconnected.

Date: 2013-02-26
4 Supervision
5 Namexx.GAlm_BDisc_SL_xx GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network B for Namexx is disconnected.
Between GOOSE control blocks received on network and GOOSE control

6 Namexx.GAlm_Cfg_SL_xx
blocks defined in GOOSE.txt file are unmatched for Namexx.
These are GOOSE alarm reports. When any alarm message is issued, the LED “ALARM” is lit without
the device being blocked. After the abnormality is removed, the device will return to normal with the
LED “ALARM” being distinguished automatically.
No. Output Signal Handling suggestion
1 GAlm_AStorm_SL Please check the related switches
2 GAlm_BStorm_SL Please check the related switches
3 GAlm_CfgFile_SL Please check the GOOSE configuration file (i.e. GOOSE.txt)
4 Namexx.GAlm_ADisc_SL_xx Please check the network
5 Namexx.GAlm_BDisc_SL_xx Please check the network
6 Namexx.GAlm_Cfg_SL_xx Please check the GOOSE configuration file and the network
Namexx is the name defined by the setting [Linkxx], xx=01, 02, 03, …, 64

Date: 2013-02-26
5 Management
5 Management
Table of Contents
5.1 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Recording ........................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.2 Event Recording .................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.4 Disturbance Recording ........................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.5 Present Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-5

Date: 2013-02-26
5 Management

Date: 2013-02-26
5 Management
5.1 Measurement
PCS-921 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The current full
scale of relay is 40 times of rated current, and there is no effect to the performance of IED due to
overflowing of current full scale. The device samples 24 points per cycle and calculates the RMS
value in each interval and updated the LCD display in every 0.5 second. The measurement data
can be displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local/remote PC via software tool.
Navigate the menu to view the sampling value through LCD screen.
This device can be used for one or two circuit breaker configuration. If it is used for two circuit
breakers configuration, some corresponding metering will be suffixed by CBn (n is the number of
the CB and it can be 1 and 2).
1. RMS Values
Access path: Press key “▲” to enter main menu firstly. Select the item “Measurements “ and
press key “ENT” to enter, and then select submenu “Measurements1” (from protection DSP) or
“Measurements2” (from fault detector DSP). Press key “ENT” to display corresponding
measurement values as below on the LCD.
 Magnitude of phase current Ia, Ib, Ic
 Magnitude of positive-sequence and negative-sequence current (I1, I2)
 Magnitude of calculated residual current 3I0
 Magnitude of three-phase protection voltage Ua, Ub, Uc (i.e. UL1)
 Magnitude of phase-to-phase voltage Uab, Ubc, Uca
 Magnitude of synchronism voltage Usyn
 Magnitude of positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltage (U1, U2)
 Magnitude of calculated residual voltage (3U0)
 Frequency of protection voltage (f)
 Frequency of synchronism voltage (f_Syn)
 Frequency difference (f_Diff)
 Voltage difference (U_Diff)
2. Phase Angle
No. Symbol Definition
1 Ang(Ua-Ub) Phase angle difference for A-phase voltage relative to B-phase voltage
2 Ang(Ub-Uc) Phase angle difference for B-phase voltage relative to C-phase voltage
3 Ang(Uc-Ua) Phase angle difference for C-phase voltage relative to A-phase voltage
4 Ang(Ua-Ia) Phase angle difference for A-phase voltage relative to A-phase current

Date: 2013-02-26
5 Management
5 Ang(Ub-Ib) Phase angle difference for B-phase voltage relative to B-phase current
6 Ang(Uc-Ic) Phase angle difference for C-phase voltage relative to C-phase current
7 Ang(Ia-Ib) Phase angle difference for A-phase current relative to B-phase current
8 Ang(Ib-Ic) Phase angle difference for B-phase current relative to C-phase current
9 Ang(Ic-Ia) Phase angle difference for C-phase current relative to A-phase current
10 phi_Diff Phase angle difference between two synchronism voltages
3. Metering of the primary value
Access path:
1) Press key “▲” to enter main menu firstly.
2) Select the item “Measurements “ and press key “ENT” to enter, and then
3) Select submenu “Measurements3”.
4) Press key “ENT” to display corresponding measurement values as below on the LCD.
No. Symbol Definition Unit
1 Ia The primary value of A-phase current of line (Ia) A
2 Ib The primary value of B-phase current of line (Ib) A
3 Ic The primary value of C-phase current of line (Ic) A
4 I1 The primary value of positive-sequence current (I1) A
5 I2 The primary value of negative-sequence current (I2) A
6 3I0 The primary value of calculated residual current (3I0) A
7 Ua The primary value of A-phase voltage (Ua) kV
8 Ub The primary value of B-phase voltage (Ub) kV
9 Uc The primary value of C-phase voltage (Uc) kV
10 Uab The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Uab) kV
11 Ubc The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Ubc) kV
12 Uca The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Uca) kV
13 U1 The primary value of positive-sequence voltage (U1) kV
14 U2 The primary value of negative-sequence voltage (U2) kV
15 3U0 The primary value of calculated residual voltage (3U0) kV
16 U_Syn The primary value of synchronism voltage (U_Syn) kV
17 f The primary value of measurement frequency (f) Hz
18 f_Syn The primary value of synchronism frequency (f_Syn) Hz
19 P The primary value of active power (P) MW
20 Q The primary value of reactive power (Q) MVar
21 S The primary value of apparent power (S) MVA

Date: 2013-02-26
5 Management
22 Cos The value of power factor (Cos) -
23 Pa The primary value of phase-A active power (P) MW
24 Pb The primary value of phase-B active power (P) MW
25 Pc The primary value of phase-C active power (P) MW
26 Qa The primary value of phase-A reactive power (Q) MVar
27 Qb The primary value of phase-B reactive power (Q) MVar
28 Qc The primary value of phase-C reactive power (Q) MVar
29 Cosa The value of phase-A power factor (Cos) -
30 Cosb The value of phase-B power factor (Cos) -
31 Cosc The value of phase-C power factor (Cos) -
The frequency difference between reference side and incoming side for CB
32 f_Diff Hz
synchronism-check.
The df/dt difference between reference side and incoming side for CB
33 df/dt Hz/s
synchronism-check.
Phase-angle difference between reference side and incoming side for CB

34 phi_Diff Deg
synchronism-check.
35 U_Diff The primary value of voltage difference. kV
36 PHr+_Pri The primary positive active energy. MWh
37 PHr-_Pri The primary negative active energy. MWh
38 QHr+_Pri The primary positive reactive energy. MVAh
39 QHr-_Pri The primary negative reactive energy. MVAh
5.2 Recording
5.2.1 Overview
PCS-921 provides the following recording functions:
1. Event recording
2. Disturbance recording
3. Present recording
All the recorded information except waveform can be viewed on local LCD or by printing.
Waveform could only be printed or extracted with PCS-Explorer software tool and a waveform
analysis software.
5.2.2 Event Recording

5.2.3 Overview
The device can store the latest 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events and 1024 device logs. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the
available space is exhausted, the oldest record is automatically overwritten by the latest one.

Date: 2013-02-26
5 Management
5.2.3.1 Disturbance Records
When any protection element operates or drops off, such as fault detector, distance protection etc.,
they will be logged in event records.
5.2.3.2 Supervision Events
The device is under automatic supervision all the time. If there are any failure or abnormal
condition detected, such as, chip damaged, VT circuit failure and so on, it will be logged in event
records.
5.2.3.3 Binary Events
When there is a binary input is energized or de-energized, i.e., its state has changed from “0” to “1”
or from “1” to “0”, it will be logged in event records.
5.2.3.4 Control Logs
When the total number of control command records reaches 256, “Control_Logs” memory area
will be full. If the device receives a new control command now, the oldest control command record
will be deleted, and then the latest control command record will be stored and displayed.
5.2.3.5 Device Logs
If an operator implements some operations on the device, such as reboot protective device,
modify setting, etc., they will be logged in event records.
5.2.4 Disturbance Recording

5.2.4.1 Application
Disturbance records can be used to have a better understanding of the behavior of the power
network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Analysis of
the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment.
This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations.
5.2.4.2 Design
A disturbance record consists of fault record and fault waveform. A disturbance record is initiated
by fault detector element.
The disturbance record has two types:
1. Fault detector element picks up without operation of protective element.
2. Fault detector element picks up with operation of protective elements.
5.2.4.3 Capacity and Information of Disturbance Records
The device can store up to 64 disturbance records with waveform in non-volatile memory. It is
based on first in first out queue that the oldest disturbance record will be overwritten by the latest
one.
For each disturbance record, the following items are included:

Date: 2013-02-26
5 Management
1. Sequence number
Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the record and displayed on LCD
screen.
2. Date and time of fault occurrence
The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock synchronized via clock synchronized
device if connected. The date and time is recorded when a system fault is detected.
3. Relative operating time
An operating time (not including the operating time of output relays) is recorded in the record.
4. Faulty phase
5. Protection elements
5.2.4.4 Capacity and Information of Fault Waveform
MON module can store 64 pieces of fault waveform oscillogram in non-volatile memory. If a new
fault occurs when 64 fault waveform have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest
one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each time recording includes 12-cycle pre-fault waveform, and 250 cycles at least and 500 cycles
at most can be recorded.
5.2.5 Present Recording

Present recording is a waveform triggered manually on on the device’s LCD or remotely through
PCS-Explorer software. Recording content of present recording is same to that of disturbance
recording.
Each time recording includes 12-cycle waveform before triggering, and 250 cycles at most can be
recorded.

Date: 2013-02-26
5 Management

Date: 2013-02-26
6 Hardware
6 Hardware
Table of Contents
6.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 6-1

6.2 Typical Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.1 Conventional CT/VT (For reference only) ........................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 ECT/EVT (For reference only) ............................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.3 CT Requirement .................................................................................................................. 6-8
6.3 Plug-in Module Description ............................................................................ 6-9

6.3.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply) ................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.2 MON Plug-in Module (Monitor) ...........................................................................................6-11
6.3.3 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input)....................................................................................... 6-14
6.3.4 DSP Plug-in Module (Logic Proces) .................................................................................. 6-19
6.3.5 NET-DSP Plug-in Module (GOOSE and SV) .................................................................... 6-20
6.3.6 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input) ....................................................................................... 6-21
6.3.7 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output) ................................................................................... 6-25
6.3.8 HMI Module ....................................................................................................................... 6-27
List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Rear view of fixed module position ..................................................................... 6-1
Figure 6.1-2 Hardware diagram.................................................................................................. 6-2
Figure 6.1-3 Front view of PCS-921 ........................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of PCS-921 ................................................................................ 6-4
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT)................................................ 6-5
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (ECT/EVT) .................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6.3-1 View of PWR plug-in module .............................................................................. 6-10
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module........................................................... 6-10
Figure 6.3-3 View of MON plug-in module .............................................................................. 6-12

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
Figure 6.3-4 Connection of communication terminal ............................................................ 6-14
Figure 6.3-5 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed ....................................... 6-15
Figure 6.3-6 Current connection of AI plug-in module .......................................................... 6-15
Figure 6.3-7 Voltage connection 1 of AI plug-in module ....................................................... 6-16
Figure 6.3-8 Voltage connection 2 of AI plug-in module ....................................................... 6-16
Figure 6.3-9 View of AI plug-in module (without synchronism voltage switchover) ......... 6-17
Figure 6.3-10 View of AI plug-in module (with synchronism voltage switchover) ............. 6-18
Figure 6.3-11 View of DSP plug-in module ............................................................................. 6-19
Figure 6.3-12 View of NET-DSP plug-in module ..................................................................... 6-20
Figure 6.3-13 View of BI plug-in module (NR1503) ................................................................ 6-21
Figure 6.3-14 View of BI plug-in module (NR1504) ................................................................ 6-22
Figure 6.3-15 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521A) ............................................................ 6-25
Figure 6.3-16 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521C)............................................................ 6-26
Figure 6.3-17 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521F) ............................................................ 6-27
List of Tables
Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition and description of PWR plug-in module ............................ 6-10
Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module (without synchronism voltage switchover) 6-17
Table 6.3-3 Terminal definition of AI module (with synchronism voltage switchover) ...... 6-18

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
6.1 General Description

PCS-921 adopts 32-bit microchip processor CPU as control core for management and monitoring
function, meanwhile, adopts high-speed digital signal processor DSP for all the protection
calculation. 24 points are sampled in every cycle and parallel processing of sampled data can be
realized in each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of the device.
PCS-921 is comprised of intelligent plug-in modules, except that few particular plug-in modules’
position cannot be changed in the whole device (gray plug-in modules as shown in Figure 6.1-1),
other plug-in modules like AI (analog input) and IO (binary input and binary output) can be flexibly
configured in the remaining slot positions.
MON module
PWR module
DSP module
DSP module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
AI module
BI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
Figure 6.1-1 Rear view of fixed module position
PCS-921 has 16 slots, PWR plug-in module, MON plug-in module and DSP plug-in module are
assigned at fixed slots.
Besides 4 fixed modules are shown in above figure, there are 12 slots can be flexibly configured.
AI plug-in module, BI plug-in module and BO plug-in module can be configured at position
between slot 02, 03 and 06~15. It should be pay attention that AI plug-in module will occupy two
slots.
This device is developed on the basis of our latest software and hardware platform, and the new
platform major characteristics are of high reliability, networking and great capability in
anti-interference. See Figure 6.1-2 for hardware diagram.

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
Output Relay
Binary Input
External
Protection
Conventional CT/VT A/D Calculation
DSP
ECVT
Fault
A/D Detector Pickup
DSP Relay
ECVT
ETHERNET
LCD +E
Clock SYN
Power
Uaux LED CPU
Supply
RJ45
Keypad
PRINT
Figure 6.1-2 Hardware diagram
The working process of the device is as shown in above figure: current and voltage from
conventional CT/VT are converted into small voltage signal and sent to DSP module after filtered
and A/D conversion for protection calculation and fault detector respectively (ECVT signal is sent
to the device without small signal and A/D convertion). When DSP module completes all the
protection calculation, the result will be recorded in 32-bit CPU on MON module. DSP module
carries out fault detector, protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON module perfomes
SOE (sequence of event) record, waveform recording, printing, communication between the
device and SAS and communication between HMI and CPU. When fault detector detects a fault
and picks up, positive power supply for output relay is provided.
The items can be flexibly configured depending on the situations like sampling method of the
device (conventional CT/VT or ECT/EVT), and the mode of binary output (conventional binary
output or GOOSE binary output). The configurations for PCS-900 series based on microcomputer
are classified into standard and optional modules.
Table 6.1-1 PCS-921 module configuration
No. ID Module description Remark

1 NR1101/NR1102 Management and monitor module (MON module) standard
2 NR1401 Analog input module (AI module ) standard

3 NR1161 Protection calculation and fault detector module (DSP module) standard
4 NR1503/NR1504 Binary input module (BI module) standard
5 NR1521 Binary output module (BO module) standard
6 NR1301 Power supply module (PWR module) standard

GOOSE and SV from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 (NET-DSP
7 NR1136 option
module)

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
No. ID Module description Remark

8 Human machine interface module (HMI module) standard
 MON module provides functions like communication with SAS, event record, setting
management etc.
 AI module converts AC current and voltage from current transformers and voltage
transformers respectively to small voltage signal.
 DSP module performs filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector calculation.
 BI module provides binary inputs via opto-couplers with rating voltage among
24V/110V/125V/220V/250V (configurable).
 BO module provides output contacts for tripping, and signal output contact for annunciation
signal, remote signal, fault and disturbance signal, operation abnormal signal etc.
 PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V into various DC voltage levels for modules of
the device.
 HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicators and multiplex RJ45 ports for user
as human-machine interface.
 NET-DSP module receives and sends GOOSE messages, sampled values (SV) from
merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 protocol.
PCS-921 series is made of a 4U height 19” chassis for flush mounting. Components mounted on
its front include a 320×240 dot matrix LCD, a 9 button keypad, 20 LED indicators and a multiplex
RJ45 port. A monolithic micro controller is installed in the equipment for these functions.
Following figures show front and rear views of PCS-921 respectively.
1 11
HEALTHY PCS-9 21
2 12
ALARM BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION
3 13
4 14
GRP
5 15
6 16 ENT
ESC
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
Figure 6.1-3 Front view of PCS-921
20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (ALARM),
others are configurable.
For the 9-button keypad, “ENT” is “enter”, “GRP” is “group number” and “ESC” is “escape”.

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1161 NR1504 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301
5V OK ALM
BO_ALM BO_FAIL
ON
OFF
DANGER
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of PCS-921
6.2 Typical Wiring

6.2.1 Conventional CT/VT (For reference only)
NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1161 NR1504 NR1521A NR1521C NR1521C NR1521F NR1301
MON module
PWR module
DSP module
DSP module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
AI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
0201 Power supply supervision 0801

0202 Ia
0203
Ib BI_01 + 0802
0204
*BI plug-in module can be independent common terminal

0205
…
0206 Ic
BI_06 + 0807
Not used 0808
0213
BI_07 + 0809
Protection Voltage
0214 Ua
0215
…
0216 Ub
0217 BI_12 + 0814
0218 Uc
Not used 0815
0219 BI_13 + 0816

Synchronism Voltage
0220 UB1
…
0221
0222 UL2
BI_18 + 0821
0223
0224 UB2 0822
-
1101
Controlled by fault
BO_01
detector element
1102
P110 1103
PWR+
External DC power Power BO_02 1104
supply P111 Supply
…
PWR- 1121
OPTO+ P107 BO_11 1122
Power supply for
opto-coupler (24V) P108
OPTO-
1201
Signal Binary Output
BO_01 1202
1203
BO_02 1204
P102 BO_FAIL
…
P103 1221
BO_ALM
BO_11 1222
P101 COM
P105 BO_FAIL
P106 1301
BO_ALM
BO_01 1302
P104 COM
(option)
1303
BO_02 1304
…
1321
BO_11 1322
A 0101
cable with single point earthing
To the screen of other coaxial
B 0102
COM
SGND 0103 1501

BO_CtrlOpn1 1502
0104
Signal Binary Output (option)
1503
SYN+ 0101 BO_CtrlCls1 1504
Clock SYN
SYN- 0102
…
SGND 0103 1517

0104 BO_CtrlOpn5 1518
RTS 0105 1519

PRINTER
BO_CtrlCls5
PRINT
TXD 0106 1520

Multiplex
SGND 0107 1521
RJ45 (Front)
BO_Ctrl 1522
P112
0225
Grounding
Bus
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT)

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT and conventional binary input and binary output)
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
Module ID NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1504 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301
MON AI DSP BI BI BO BO BO BO PWR
PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT and GOOSE binary input and binary output)
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
Module ID NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1136 NR1504 NR1301

NET-
MON AI DSP BI PWR
DSP
6.2.2 ECT/EVT (For reference only)
NR1102 NR1161 NR1161 NR1136 NR1503 NR1521A NR1521C NR1301
NET-DSP Module
MON module
PWR module
DSP module
DSP module
BO module
BO module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
BI_01 + 0801
*BI plug-in module can be common negative

Phase A RX - 0802
FO interface for SV channel

SV from
ECT/EVT
MU
Phase B BI_02 + 0803
(LC Type)
Up to 8
Phase C TX - 0804
terminal
BI_03 + 0805
…
- 0806
…
BI_11 + 0821
- 0822
PWR+ P110
External DC power Power 1101
Controlled by fault
BO_01
detector element
supply P111 Supply 1102
PWR-
OPTO+ P107 1103
Power supply for BO_02 1104
opto-coupler (24V) P108
OPTO-
…
1121
BO_11 1122
1201

P102 BO_FAIL BO_01 1202
P103 BO_ALM 1203
P101 COM BO_02 1204
P105 BO_FAIL
…
1221
P106 BO_ALM BO_11 1222
P104 COM
1501
BO_CtrlOpn1 1502
Signal Binary Output (option)
1503
A 0101 BO_CtrlCls1 1504
B 0102
COM
…
SGND 0103
1517
0104 BO_CtrlOpn5 1518
SYN+ 0101 1519
Clock SYN
SYN- 0102 BO_CtrlCls5 1520

SGND 0103 1521
0104 BO_Ctrl 1522
RTS 0105
PRINTER
IRIG-B
PRINT
TXD 0106
Multiplex
SGND 0107 RJ45 (Front) P112
0225 Grounding
Bus
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (ECT/EVT)
PCS-921 ECT/EVT, GOOSE binary input and binary output
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
Module ID NR1102 NR1161 NR1136 NR1504 NR1301

NET-
MON DSP BI PWR
DSP
PCS-921 ECT/EVT, conventional binary input and binary output
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
Module ID NR1102 NR1161 NR1136 NR1504 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301
NET-
MON DSP BI BI BO BO BO BO PWR
DSP

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
In the protection system adopting electronic current and voltage transformer (ECT/EVT), the
merging unit will merge the sample data from ECT/EVT, and then send it to the device through
multi-mode optical fibre. DSP module receives the data from merging unit through the optical-fibre
interface to complete the protection calculation and fault detector.
The difference between the hardware platform based on ECT/EVT and the hardware platform
based on conventional CT/VT lies in the receiving module of sampled values only, and the device
receives the sampled value from merging unit through multi-mode optical fibre.
6.2.3 CT Requirement
-Rated primary current Ipn:
According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.
-Rated continuous thermal current Icth:
According to the maximum load current.
-Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn:
According to the maximum fault current.
-Rated secondary current Isn
-Accuracy limit factor Kalf:
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

Icth Rated continuous thermal current (amps)
Ith Rated short-time thermal current (amps)
Idyn Rated dynamic current (amps)
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor ()Kalf=Ipal/Ipn
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Performance verification
Esl > Esl′
Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)
Rated resistance burden (ohms)
Rbn 2
Rbn=Sbn/Isn
Sbn Rated burden (VAs)
Esl′ Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
Esl′ = k×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn

k stability factor = 2
Protective checking factor current (amps)
Ipcf
Same as the maximum prospective fault current
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)
Real resistance burden (ohms)
Rb
Rb=Rr+2×RL+Rc
Rc Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm (ohms)
RL Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
Rr Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)
For example:
1. Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn) = kalf×Isn×(Rct+ Sbn/ Isn2)
= 30×5×(1+60/25)=510V
2. Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A
Esl′ = 2×Ipcf×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
= 2×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+(Rr+2×RL+Rc))/Ipn
= 2×40000×5×(1+(0.1+2×0.5+0.1))/2000=440V
Thus, Esl > Esl′
6.3 Plug-in Module Description

The device consists of PWR plug-in module, MON plug-in module, DSP plug-in module, AI plug-in
module, BI plug-in module, BO plug-in module and NET-DSP plug-in module. Terminal definitions
and application of each plug-in module are introduced as follows.
6.3.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply)

PWR module is a DC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input and output. It has an
input voltage range as described in Chapter 2 “Technical Data”. The standardized output voltages
are +5V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the output voltages are continuously monitored.
The +5V DC output provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power
supply in this device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
A 12-pin connector is fixed on PWR module. The terminal definition of the connector is described

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
as below.
NR1301A
5V OK ALM
BO_ALM BO_FAIL
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
Figure 6.3-1 View of PWR plug-in module
The power switch in the dotted box of above figure maybe is not existed.
01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
03
04
BO_FAIL
05
BO_ALM
06
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module
Terminal definition and description is shown as follows:
Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition and description of PWR plug-in module
Terminal No. Symbol Description
01 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1
02 BO_FAIL Device failure output 1 (01-02, NC)
03 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)
04 BO_COM2 Common terminal 2
05 BO_FAIL Device failure output 2 (04-05, NC)

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
06 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)
07 OPTO+ Positive power supply for BI module (24V)
08 OPTO- Negative power supply for BI module (24V)
09 Blank Not used
10 PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the device (250V/220V/125V/110V)
11 PWR- Negative input of power supply for the device (250V/220V/125V/110V)
12 GND Grounded connection of the power supply
NOTE!
The standard rated voltage of PWR module is self-adaptive to 88~300Vdc. If input voltage
is out of range, an alarm signal (Fail_Device) will be issued. For non-standard rated
voltage power supply module please specify when place order, and check if the rated
voltage of power supply module is the same as the voltage of power source before the
device being put into service.
PWR module provides terminal 12 and grounding screw for device grounding. Terminal 12
shall be connected to grounding screw and then connected to the earth copper bar of
panel via dedicated grounding wire.
Effective grounding is the most important measure for a device to prevent EMI, so effective
grounding must be ensured before the device is put into service.
PCS-921, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These
capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied
periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
6.3.2 MON Plug-in Module (Monitor)

MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM, Ethernet
controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete device, human
machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module comprises 100BaseT Ethernet
interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces that exchange information with above system by
using IEC 61850, PPS/IRIG-B differential time synchronization interface and RS-232 printing
interface.
Modules with various combinations of memory and interface are available as shown in the table
below.

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
NR1102A NR1102C NR1102B NR1102D NR1102H NR1102I NR1101E
TX TX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX RX
TX TX
RX RX
ETHERNET ETHERNET
Figure 6.3-3 View of MON plug-in module
Module ID Memory Interface Terminal No. Usage Physical Layer

2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock Twisted pair wire
RS-485
03 SGND synchronization
NR1102A 64M DDR
04
05 RTS
RS-232 06 TXD To printer Cable
07 SGND
01 SYN+
RS-485
NR1102B 64M DDR
04
05 RTS
07 SGND
01 SYN+
NR1102C 128M DDR 02 SYN- To clock Twisted pair wire
RS-485
04

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
05 RTS
07 SGND
01 SYN+
RS-485
NR1102D 128M DDR
04
05 RTS
07 SGND
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre SC
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485 Twisted pair wire
NR1102H 128M DDR 03 SGND synchronization
04
05 RTS
07 SGND
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485 Twisted pair wire
NR1102I 128M DDR 03 SGND synchronization
04
05 RTS
07 SGND
01 A
02 B
RS-485 To SCADA
03 SGND
04
05 A
06 B Twisted pair wire
NR1101E 128M DDR RS-485 To SCADA
07 SGND
08
09 SYN+
10 SYN- To clock
RS-485
12
RS-232 13 RTS To printer Cable

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
14 TXD
15 SGND
16
The correct connection is shown in Figure 6.3-4. Generally, the shielded cable with two pairs of
twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to connect
the “+” and “–” terminals of difference signal. The other pair of twisted pairs are used to connect
the signal ground of the communication interface. The module reserves a free terminal for all the
communication ports. The free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device, and it is
used to connect the external shields of the cable when connecting multiple devices in series. The
external shield of the cable shall be grounded at one of the ends only.
Twisted pair wire

485-1A 01
485-1B 02
COM
SGND 03
04
Twisted pair wire

SYN+ 01
Clock SYN
SYN- 02
SGND 03
04
Twisted pair wire

RTS 05 PRINT
TXD 06
SGND 07
Figure 6.3-4 Connection of communication terminal
6.3.3 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input)

AI module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT. It is assigned to
slot numbers 02 and 03. However, the module is not required if the device is used with ECT/EVT.
For AI module, if the plug is not put in the socket, external CT circuit is closed itself. Just shown as
below.
Plug
Socket
In
Out
plug is not put in the socket

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
In
Out
Put the plug in the socket
Figure 6.3-5 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed
There are two types of AI module with rating 5 A or 1 A. Please declare which kind of AI module is
needed before ordering. Maximum linear range of the current converter is 40In.
Three phase currents (Ia, Ib and Ic) are input to AI module separately, terminal 01, 03 and 05 are
polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT installed on line is at line side. Three phase
voltages (Ua, Ub, and Uc) are input to AI module, terminal 13, 15 and 17 are polarity marks.
P2 S2
P1 S1
02 01
04 03
06 05
Figure 6.3-6 Current connection of AI plug-in module

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
Figure 6.3-7 Voltage connection 1 of AI plug-in module
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
Figure 6.3-8 Voltage connection 2 of AI plug-in module
If the synchronism voltage need to be connected, there are two situations:
1. Without synchronism voltage switchover
The synchronism voltage can be connected to terminal 19 and 20 (terminal 19 is polarity mark).

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
The synchronism voltage could be any phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage.
Ia 01 Ian 02
NR1401
Ib 03 Ibn 04
Ic 05 Icn 06
07 08
09 10
11 12
Ua 13 Uan 14
Ub 15 Ubn 16
Uc 17 Ucn 18
Us 19 Usn 20
21 22
23 24
Figure 6.3-9 View of AI plug-in module (without synchronism voltage switchover)
Table 6.3-2 lists the terminal number and definition of AI module.
Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module (without synchronism voltage switchover)
Terminal No. Definition Definition

01 Ia The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)
02 Ian The current of A-phase
03 Ib The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)
04 Ibn The current of B-phase
05 Ic The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)
06 Icn The current of C-phase
07 Reserved
08 Reserved
09 Reserved
10 Reserved
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Ua The voltage of A-phase (Polarity mark)
14 Uan The voltage of A-phase
15 Ub The voltage of B-phase (Polarity mark)
16 Ubn The voltage of B-phase
17 Uc The voltage of C-phase (Polarity mark)
18 Ucn The voltage of C-phase
19 Us Synchronism voltage (Polarity mark)

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware

20 Usn Synchronism voltage
21 Reserved
22 Reserved
23 Reserved
24 Reserved
25 GND Ground
2. With synchronism voltage switchover
UB1, UB2 and UL2 are the synchronism voltage from bus VT and line VT used for synchrocheck, it
could be any phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage. The device can automatically
switch synchronism voltage according to auxiliary contact of CB position or DS position.
Ia 01 Ian 02
NR1401
Ib 03 Ibn 04
Ic 05 Icn 06
07 08
09 10
11 12
Ua 13 Uan 14
Ub 15 Ubn 16
Uc 17 Ucn 18
UB1 19 UB1n 20
UL2 21 UL2n 22
UB2 23 UB2n 24
Figure 6.3-10 View of AI plug-in module (with synchronism voltage switchover)
Table 6.3-3 lists the terminal number and definition of AI module.
Table 6.3-3 Terminal definition of AI module (with synchronism voltage switchover)

01 Ia The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)
02 Ian The current of A-phase
03 Ib The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)
04 Ibn The current of B-phase
05 Ic The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)
06 Icn The current of C-phase
07 Reserve
08 Reserve

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware

09 Reserve
10 Reserve
11 Reserve
12 Reserve
13 Ua The voltage of A-phase (Polarity mark)
14 Uan The voltage of A-phase
15 Ub The voltage of B-phase (Polarity mark)
16 Ubn The voltage of B-phase
17 Uc The voltage of C-phase (Polarity mark)
18 Ucn The voltage of C-phase
19 UB1 The voltage of bus 1 (Polarity mark)
20 UB1n The voltage of bus 1
21 UL2 The voltage of line 2 (Polarity mark)
22 UL2n The voltage of line 2
23 UB2 The voltage of bus 2 (Polarity mark)
24 UB2n The voltage of bus 2
25 GND Ground
If the auto-reclosing is enabled but synchronism check is not required, the synchronism voltage
should be disconnected.
6.3.4 DSP Plug-in Module (Logic Proces)
NR1161
Figure 6.3-11 View of DSP plug-in module

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
This device can be equipped with 2 DSP plug-in modules at most and 1 DSP plug-in module at
least. The default DSP plug-in module is necessary, which mainly is responsible for protection
function including fault detector and protection calculation.
The module consists of high-performance double DSP (digital signal processor), 16-digit
high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and manage other peripherals. One
of double DSP is responsible for protection calculation, and can fulfill analog data acquisition,
protection logic calculation and tripping output. The other is responsible for fault detector, and can
fulfill analog data acquisition, fault detector and providing power supply to output relay.
When the module is connected with conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through AI plug-in module. When the module is connected with ECT/EVT, it can
receive the real-time synchronous sampled value from merging unit through NET-DSP plug-in
module.
The other module is optional and it is not required unless control and manual closing with
synchronism check are equppied with this device. The default DSP plug-in module is fixed at slot
04 and the option DSP plug-in module is fixed at slot 06.
6.3.5 NET-DSP Plug-in Module (GOOSE and SV)
NR1136A NR1136C
RX
Figure 6.3-12 View of NET-DSP plug-in module
This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), 2~8 100Mbit/s
optical-fibre interface (LC type) and selectable IRIG-B interface (ST type). It supports GOOSE and
SV by IEC 61850-9-2 protocols. It can receive and send GOOSE messages to intelligent control
device, and receive SV from MU (merging unit).

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
This module supports IEEE1588 network time protocol, E2E and P2P defined in IEEE1588
protocol can be selected.This module supports Ethernet IEEE802.3 time adjustment message
format, UDP time adjustment message format and GMRP.
6.3.6 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input)

There are two kinds of BI modules available, NR1503 and NR1504. Up to 3 BI modules can be
equipped with one device. The rated voltage can be selected to be 24V/48V (NR1503D or
NR1504D) or 110V/220V/125V/250V (NR1503A or NR1504A).
Each BI module is with a 22-pin connector for 11 binary inputs (NR1503) or 18 binary inputs
(NR1504).
For NR1503, each binary input has independent negative power input of opto-coupler, and can be
configurable. The terminal definition of the connector of BI plug-in module is described as below.
[BI_n] (n=01, 02, …,11 can be configured as a specified binary input by PCS-Explorer software.)
BI_01 01
NR1503 Opto01- 02
BI_02 03
Opto02- 04
BI_03 05
Opto03- 06
BI_04 07
Opto04- 08
BI_05 09
Opto05- 10
BI_06 11
Opto06- 12
BI_07 13
Opto07- 14
BI_08 15
Opto08- 16
BI_09 17
Opto09- 18
BI_10 19
Opto10- 20
BI_11 21
Opto11- 22
Figure 6.3-13 View of BI plug-in module (NR1503)
Terminal description for NR 1503 is shown as follows.

01 BI_01 Configurable binary input 1
02 Opto01- Negative supply of configurable binary input 1

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware

For NR1504, all binary inputs share one common negative power input, and is configurable. The
terminal definition of the connector of BI plug-in module is described as below. [BI_n] (n=01,
02,…,18 can be configured as a specified binary input by PCS-Explorer software.)
Opto+ 01
NR1504 BI_01 02
BI_02 03
BI_03 04
BI_04 05
BI_05 06
BI_06 07
08
BI_07 09
BI_08 10
BI_09 11
BI_10 12
BI_11 13
BI_12 14
15
BI_13 16
BI_14 17
BI_15 18
BI_16 19
BI_17 20
BI_18 21
COM- 22
Figure 6.3-14 View of BI plug-in module (NR1504)
Terminal description for NR1504 is shown as follows.

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware

01 Opto+ Positive supply of power supply of the module
08 Blank Not used
15 Blank Not used
22 COM- Common terminal of negative supply of binary inputs
First four binary signals (BI_01, BI_02, BI_03, BI_04) in first BI plug-in module are fixed, they are
[BI_TimeSyn], [BI_Print], [BI_Maintenance] and [BI_RstTarg] respectively.
1. Binary input: [BI_TimeSyn]
It is used to receive clock synchronization signal from clock synchronization device, the binary
input [BI_TimeSyn] will change from “0” to “1” once pulse signal is received. When the device
adopts “Conventional” mode as clock synchronization mode (refer to section “Communication
Settings”), the device can receives PPM (pulse per minute) and PPS (pulse per second). If the
setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as other values, this binary input is invalid.
2. Binary input: [BI_Print]
It is used to manually trigger printing latest report when the equipment is configured as manual
printing mode by logic setting [En_AutoPrint]=0. The printer button is located on the panel usually.
If the equipment is configured as automatic printing mode ([En_AutoPrint]=1), report will be printed
automatically as soon as it is formed.
3. Binary input: [BI_Maintenance]
It is used to block communication export when this binary input is energized. During device
maintenance or testing, this binary input is then energized not to send reports via communication
port, local display and printing still work as usual. This binary input should be de-energized when

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
the device is restored back to normal.
The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for digital substation communication adopting
IEC61850 protocol is given as follows.
1) Processing mechanism for MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) message
a) The protection device should send the state of this binary input to client.
b) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the sent message changes
to “1”.
c) When this binary input is energized, the client cannot control the isolator link and circuit
breaker, modify settings and switch setting group remotely.
d) According to the value of the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent, the client
discriminate whether this message is maintenance message, and then deal with it correspondingly.
If the message is the maintenance message, the content of the message will not be displayed on
real-time message window, audio alarm not issued, but the picture is refreshed so as to ensure
that the state of the picture is in step with the actual state. The maintenance message will be
stored, and can be inquired, in independent window.
2) Processing mechanism for GOOSE message
a) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” in the GOOSE message sent by the
protection device changes to “1”.
b) For the receiving end of GOOSE message, it will compare the value of the bit “Test” in the
GOOSE message received by it with the state of its own binary input (i..e [BI_Maintenance]), the
message will be thought as invalid unless they are conformable.
3) Processing mechanism for SV (Sampling Value) message
a) When this binary input of merging unit is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling
data in the SV message sent change “1”.
b) For the receiving end of SV message, if the value of bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling data
in the SV message received is “1”, the relevant protection functions will be disabled, but under
maintenance state, the protection device should calculate and display the magnitude of sampling
data.
c) For duplicated protection function configurations, all merging units of control module
configured to receive sampling should be also duplicated. Both dual protection devices and dual
merging units should be fully independent each other, and one of them is in maintenance state will
not affect the normal operation of the other.
4. Binary input: [BI_RstTarg]
It is used to reset latching signal relay and LCD displaying. The reset is done by pressing a button
on the panel.

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
Note!
The rated voltage of binary input is optional: 24V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V or 250V, which
must be specified when placed order. It is necessary to check whether the rated voltage of
BI module complies with site DC supply rating before put the relay in service.
6.3.7 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output)

NR1521A, NR1521C and NR1521F modules are three standard binary output modules. The
contacts provided by NR1521A, NR1521C and NR1521F are all normally open (NO) contacts.
Output contact can be configured as a specified tripping output contact and a signal output contact
respectively by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement.
NR1521A can provide 11 output contacts controlled by fault detector.
01
BO_01
NR1521A 02
03
BO_02
04
05
BO_03
06
07
BO_04
08
09
BO_05
10
11
BO_06
12
13
BO_07
14
15
BO_08
16
17
BO_09
18
19
BO_10
20
21
BO_11
22
Figure 6.3-15 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521A)
NR1521C can provide 11 output contacts without controlled by fault detector.

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
01
BO_01
NR1521C 02
03
BO_02
04
05
BO_03
06
07
BO_04
08
09
BO_05
10
11
BO_06
12
13
BO_07
14
15
BO_08
16
17
BO_09
18
19
BO_10
20
21
BO_11
22
Figure 6.3-16 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521C)
BO plug-in module (NR1521F) is dedicatedly for remote/manual open or closing to circuit breaker,
disconnector and earth switch. 5 pairs of binary outputs (one for open and the other for closing)
can be provided by this BO plug-in module configured in slot 15 if measurement and control
function is equipped with the device. Up to 10 pairs of binary outputs can be provided by two BO
plug-in modules that can be configured in slot 14 and 15 respectively. (BO plug-in module
configured in slot 14 is optional if open or closing contacts is not enough)
A normally open contact is presented via terminal 21-22 designated as ROS (i.e. remote operation
signal). Whenever any of binary output contacts for open or closing is closed, ROS contact will
close to issue a signal indicating that this device is undergoing a remote operation.
BO plug-in module (NR1521F) is displayed as shown in the following figure.

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware
01
BO_CtrlOpn01
NR1521F 02
03
BO_CtrlCls01
04
05
BO_CtrlOpn02
06
07
BO_CtrlCls02
08
09
BO_CtrlOpn03
10
11
BO_CtrlCls03
12
13
BO_CtrlOpn04
14
15
BO_CtrlCls04
16
17
BO_CtrlOpn05
18
19
BO_CtrlCls05
20
21
BO_Ctrl
22
Figure 6.3-17 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521F)
6.3.8 HMI Module

The display panel consists of liquid crystal display module, keyboard, LED and ARM processor.
The functions of ARM processor include display control of the liquid crystal display module,
keyboard processing, and exchanging data with the CPU through LAN port etc. The liquid crystal
display module is a high-performance grand liquid crystal panel with soft back lighting, which has a
user-friendly interface and an extensive display range.

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Hardware

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
7 Settings
Table of Contents
7.1 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-1

7.1.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Access Path ......................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2 Device Settings ............................................................................................... 7-5

7.2.2 Access Path ......................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3 System Settings .............................................................................................. 7-6

7.3.2 Access Path ......................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.4 Protection Settings ......................................................................................... 7-7

7.4.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.5 Logic Link Settings ....................................................................................... 7-12

7.5.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................. 7-12
7.5.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.6 Measurement and Control Settings ............................................................. 7-13

7.6.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................. 7-13
7.6.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-15
List of Tables
Table 7.1-1 Communication settings ......................................................................................... 7-1
Table 7.2-1 Device settings......................................................................................................... 7-5
Table 7.3-1 System settings ....................................................................................................... 7-6

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
The device has some setting groups for protection to coordinate with the mode of power system
operation, one of which is assigned to be active. However, equipment parameters are common for
all protection setting groups.
Note!
All current settings in this chapter are secondary current converted from primary current by
CT ratio. Zero-sequence current or voltage setting is configured according to 3I0 or 3U0
and negative sequence current setting according to I2 or U2.
7.1 Communication Settings

Table 7.1-1 Communication settings
No. Item Range

1 IP_LAN1 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
2 Mask_LAN1 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
3 IP_LAN2 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
4 Mask_LAN2 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
5 En_LAN2 0 or 1
6 IP_LAN3 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
7 Mask_LAN3 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
8 En_LAN3 0 or 1
9 IP_LAN4 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
10 Mask_LAN4 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
11 En_LAN4 0 or 1
12 Gateway 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
13 En_Broadcast 0 or 1
14 Addr_RS485A 0~255
15 Baud_RS485A 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)
16 Protocol_RS485A 0, 1 or 2
17 Addr_RS485B 0~255
18 Baud_RS485B 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)
19 Protocol_RS485B 0, 1 or 2
20 Threshold_Measmt 0~100%
21 Period_Measmt 0~65535s
22 Format_Measmt 0, 1
23 Baud_Printer 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)
24 En_AutoPrint 0 or 1
Conventional
SAS
25 Opt_TimeSyn
Advanced
NoTImeSyn

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
No. Item Range

26 IP_Server_SNTP 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
27 OffsetHour_UTC -12~+12 (hrs)
28 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60 (min)
7.1.1 Setting Description

1. IP_LAN1, IP_LAN2, IP_LAN3, IP_LAN4
IP address of Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4
2. Mask_LAN1, Mask_LAN2, Mask_LAN3, Mask_LAN4
Subnet mask of Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4
3. En_LAN2, En_LAN3, En_LAN4
Put Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 in service
They are used for Ethernet communication based on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. When the IEC
61850 protocol is applied, the IP address of Ethernet A will be GOOSE source MAC address.
Ethernet port 1 is always in service by default.
4. Gateway
IP address of Gateway (router)
5. En_Broadcast
This setting is only used only for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. If NR network IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is used, the setting must be set as “1”.
0: the device does not send UDP messages through network
1: the device sends UDP messages through network
6. Addr_RS485A, Addr_RS485B
They are the device′s communication address used to communicate with the SCADA or RTU via
serial ports (port A and port B).
7. Baud_RS485A, Baud_RS485B
Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port A or B
8. Protocol_RS485A, Protocol_RS485B
Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port A or B
0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
1: Modbus Protocol
2: Reserved

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
Note!
Above table listed all the communication settings, the device delivered to the user maybe
only show some settings of them according to the communication interface configuration.
If only the Ethernet ports are applied, the settings about the serial ports (port A and port B)
are not listed in this submenu. And the settings about the Ethernet ports only listed in this
submenu according to the actual number of Ethernet ports.
The standard arrangement of the Ethernet port is two, at most four (predetermined when
ordering). Set the IP address according to actual arrangement of Ethernet numbers and
the un-useful port/ports need not be configured. If PCS-Explorer configuration tool
auxiliary software is connected with this device through the Ethernet, the IP address of the
PCS-Explorer must be set as one of the available IP address of this device.
9. Threshold_Measmt
Threshold value of sending measurement values to SCADA through IEC 60870-5-103 or

IEC61850 protocol.
Default value: “1%”
10. Period_Measmt
The time period for equipment sends measurement data to SCADA through IEC 60870-5-103
protocol.
Default value: “60”
11. Format_Measmt
The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC
60870-5-103 protocol.
0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12
1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard
12. Baud_Printer
Baud rate of printer port
13. En_AutoPrint
If automatic print is required for fault report after protection operating, it is set as “1”. Otherwise, it
should be set to “0”.
14. Opt_TimeSyn
There are four selections for clock synchronization of device, shown as follows.
 Conventional
PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level
PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn]
PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn]
 SAS
SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol
 Advanced
IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588
IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface
PPS (Fiber) PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface
 NoTimeSync
When no time synchronization signal is connected to the device, please select this option and the
alarm message [Alm_TimeSyn] will not be issued anymore.
“Conventional” mode and “SAS” mode are always be supported by the device, but “Advanced”
mode is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]
may be issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.
1) When “SAS” is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device
will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When “Conventional” mode is selected, if there
is no conventional clock synchronization signal, “SAS” mode will be enabled automatically
with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] issued simultaneously.
2) When “Advanced” mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal

connected to NET-DSP module, “SAS” mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal
[Alm_TimeSyn] issued simultaneously.
3) When “NoTimeSyn” mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without time
synchronization signal. But the device can be still synchronized if receiving time
synchronization signal.
Note!
The clock message via IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is invalid when the device receives the
IRIG-B signal through RCS-485 port.
15. IP_Server_SNTP
It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to
the relay or BCU.

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
16. OffsetHour_UTC, OffsetMinute_UTC
If the IEC61850 protocol is adopted in substations, the time tags of communication messages are
required according to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
The setting [OffsetHour_UTC] is used to set the hour offset of the current time zone to the GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time) zone; for example, if a relay is applied in China, the time zone of China is
east 8th time zone, so this setting is set as “8”. The setting [OffsetMinute_UTC] is used to set the
minute offset of the current time zone to the GMT zone.
st nd rd th th
Time zone GMT zone East 1 East 2 East 3 East 4 East 5
Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5
th th th th th th
Time zone East 6 East 7 East 8 East 9 East 10 East 11
Setting 6 7 8 9 10 11
th st nd rd th th
Time zone East/West 12 West 1 West 2 West 3 West 4 West 5
Setting 12/-12 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
th th th th th th
Time zone West 6 West 7 West 8 West 9 West 10 West 11
Setting -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11
7.1.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupComm Settings
7.2 Device Settings

Table 7.2-1 Device settings
No. Item Range

1 HDR_EncodedMode GB18030, UTF-8
2 Opt_Caption_103 0, 1 or 2
3 Bxx.Un_BinaryInput 24V, 30V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V

1. HDR_EncodedMode
Select encoding format of header (HDR) file COMTRADE recording file
Default value is “UTF-8”.
2. Opt_Caption_103
Select the caption language sent to SAS via IEC103 protocol
0: Current language
1: Fixed Chinese
2: Fixed English
Default value of [Opt_Caption_103] is 0 (i.e. current language), and please set it to 1 (i.e. Fixed
Chinese) if the SAS is supplied by China Manufacturer.

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
3. Bxx.Un_BinaryInput
This setting is used to set voltage level of binary input module. If low-voltage BI module is
equipped, 24V, 30V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement, and if high-voltage BI
module is equipped, 110V, 125V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.
Bxx: this plug-in module is inserted in slot xx.
7.2.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupDevice Settings
7.3 System Settings

Table 7.3-1 System settings
No. Item Range Unit
1 Active_Grp 1~10
2 Opt_SysFreq 50 or 60 Hz
3 PrimaryEquip_Name Maximum 12 character

4 U1n 33.00~65500.00 kV
5 U2n 80.00~220.00 V
6 I1n 100~65500 A
7 I2n 1 or 5 A
8 f_High_FreqAlm 50~65 Hz
9 f_Low_FreqAlm 45~60 Hz

1. Active_Grp
The number of active setting group, 10 setting groups can be configured for protection settings,
and only one is active at a time.
2. PrimaryEquip_Name
It is recognized by the device automatically. Such setting is used for printing messages.
3. Opt_SysFreq
It is option of system frequency, and can be set as 50Hz or 60Hz.
4. Un1
Primary rated voltage of VT;
5. Un2
Secondary rated voltage of VT;
6. In1

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
Primary rated current of CT;
7. In2
Secondary rated current of CT;
8. f_High_FreqAlm
Frequency upper limit setting. The device will issue an alarm [Alm_Freq], when system frequency
is higher than the setting.
9. f_Low_FreqAlm
Frequency lower limit setting. The device will issue an alarm [Alm_Freq], when system frequency
is lower than the setting.
7.3.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsSystem Settings
7.4 Protection Settings

All settings of protection are based on secondary ratings of VT and CT. For the specific project,
some settings relevant to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure
protection module maybe with the suffix of “_CB1” and “_CB2” what represent the settings
correspond to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure protection module
for circuit breaker 1 and circuit breaker 2 respectively.
Unn: rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage.
Un: rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
In: rated secondary current.

7.4.1.1 Fault Detector Settings (FD)
No. Item Remark Range

1 FD.DPFC.I_Set Current setting of DPFC current FD element (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
2 FD.ROC.3I0_Set Current setting of neutral current FD element (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
7.4.1.2 Auxiliary Element (Aux.E)

Extended time delay of current change auxiliary
1 AuxE.OCD.t_DDO 0.000~10.000 (s)
element
2 AuxE.OCD.En Enabling/disabling current change auxiliary element 0 or 1
Current setting of stage 1 residual current auxiliary
3 AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In
element
Enabling/disabling stage 1 residual current auxiliary
element

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings

5 AuxE.ROC2.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In
element
element
7 AuxE.ROC3.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In
element
element
Current setting of stage 1 phase current auxiliary
9 AuxE.OC1.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In
element
Enabling/disabling stage 1 phase current auxiliary
element
11 AuxE.OC2.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In
element
element
13 AuxE.OC3.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In
element
element
15 AuxE.UVD.U_Set Voltage setting for voltage change auxiliary element 0~Un
Extended time delay of voltage change auxiliary
16 AuxE.UVD.t_DDO 0.000~10.000 (s)
element
17 AuxE.UVD.En Enabling/disabling voltage change auxiliary element 0 or 1
Voltage setting for phase-to-ground under voltage
18 AuxE.UVG.U_Set 0~Un
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling phase-to-ground under voltage
19 AuxE.UVG.En 0 or 1
auxiliary element
Voltage setting for phase-to-phase under voltage
20 AuxE.UVS.U_Set 0~Unn
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling phase-to-phase under voltage
21 AuxE.UVS.En 0 or 1
auxiliary element
22 AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set Voltage setting for residual voltage auxiliary element 0~Un
23 AuxE.ROV.En Enabling/disabling residual voltage auxiliary element 0 or 1
7.4.1.3 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P)

Setting of second harmonic component for blocking
1 50/51P.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000
phase overcurrent elements
Current setting for stage 1 of phase overcurrent
2 50/51P1.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
protection
Time delay for stage 1 of phase overcurrent
3 50/51P1.t_Op 0.000~20.000 (s)
protection

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
4 50/51P1.En Enable stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection 0 or 1

Enable second harmonic blocking for stage 1 of
5 50/51P1.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1
phase overcurrent protection
Current setting for stage 2 of phase overcurrent
6 50/51P2.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
protection
Time delay for stage 2 of phase overcurrent
7 50/51P2.t_Op 0.000~20.000 (s)
protection
8 50/51P2.En Enable stage 2 of phase overcurrent protection 0 or 1
9 50/51P2.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1
phase overcurrent protection
7.4.1.4 Earth Fault Protection Settings (50/51G)

Setting of second harmonic component for blocking
1 50/51G.K_Hm2_Blk 0.000~1.000
earth fault elements
2 50/51G1.3I0_Set Current setting for stage 1 of earth fault protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
3 50/51G1.t_Op Time delay for stage 1 of earth fault protection 0.000~20.000 (s)
4 50/51G1.En Enable stage 1 of earth fault protection 0 or 1
5 50/51G1.En_Hm2 0 or 1
earth fault protection
6 50/51G2.3I0_Set Current setting for stage 2 of earth fault protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
7 50/51G2.t_Op Time delay for stage 2 of earth fault protection 0.000~20.000 (s)
8 50/51G2.En Enable stage 2 of earth fault protection 0 or 1
9 50/51G2.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1
earth fault protection
7.4.1.5 Dead Zone Protection (50DZ)
No. Name Remark Range

1 50DZ.I_Set Current setting of dead zone protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
2 50DZ.t_Op Time delay of dead zone protection 0.000~10.000 (s)
3 50DZ.En Enable dead zone protection 0 or 1
7.4.1.6 Breaker Failure Protection Settings (50BF)

1 50BF.I_Set Current setting of phase current criterion for BFP (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
Current setting of zero-sequence current criterion
2 50BF.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
for BFP
Current setting of negative-sequence current
3 50BF.I2_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
criterion for BFP
4 50BF.t_ReTrp Time delay of re-tripping for BFP 0.000~10.000 (s)
5 50BF.t1_Op Time delay of stage 1 for BFP 0.000~10.000 (s)
6 50BF.t2_Op Time delay of stage 2 for BFP 0.000~10.000 (s)
7 50BF.En Enable breaker failure protection 0 or 1

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
8 50BF.En_ReTrp Enable re-trip function for BFP 0 or 1

Enable zero-sequence current criterion for BFP
9 50BF.En_3I0_1P 0 or 1
initiated by single-phase tripping contact
Enable zero-sequence current criterion for BFP
10 50BF.En_3I0_3P 0 or 1
initiated by three-phase tripping contact
Enable negative-sequence current criterion for BFP
11 50BF.En_I2_3P 0 or 1
initiated by three-phase tripping contact
Enable breaker failure protection can be initiated by
12 50BF.En_CB_Ctrl 0 or 1
normally closed contact of circuit breaker
7.4.1.7 Pole Discrepancy Protection Settings (62PD)

Current setting of residual current criterion for pole
1 62PD.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
Current setting of negative-sequence current
2 62PD.I2_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
criterion for pole discrepancy protection
3 62PD.t_Op Time delay of pole discrepancy protection 0.000~600.000 (s)
4 62PD.En Enable pole discrepancy protection 0 or 1

Enable residual current criterion and
5 62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl negative-sequence current criterion for pole 0 or 1
7.4.1.8 Synchrocheck Settings (25)

1 25.Opt_Source_UL Voltage selecting mode of line 0~5
2 25.Opt_Source_UB Voltage selecting mode of bus 0~5
3 25.U_Dd Voltage threshold of dead check 0.05Un~0.8Un (V)
4 25.U_Lv Voltage threshold of live check 0.5Un~Un (V)
5 25.K_Usyn Compensation coefficient for synchronism voltage 0.20-5.00
6 25.phi_Diff Phase difference limit of synchronism check for AR 0~ 89 (Deg)
Compensation for phase difference between two

7 25.phi_Comp 0~359 (Deg)
8 25.f_Diff Frequency difference limit of synchronism check for AR 0.02~1.00 (Hz)
9 25.U_Diff Voltage difference limit of synchronism check for AR 0.02Un~0.8Un (V)
10 25.t_DeadChk Time delay to confirm dead check condition 0.010~25.000 (s)
11 25.t_SynChk Time delay to confirm synchronism check condition 0.010~25.000 (s)
12 25.En_fDiffChk Enable frequency difference check 0 or 1

13 25.En_SynChk Enable synchronism check 0 or 1
14 25.En_DdL_DdB Enable dead line and dead bus (DLDB) check 0 or 1
15 25.En_DdL_LvB Enable dead line and live bus (DLLB) check 0 or 1
16 25.En_LvL_DdB Enable live line and dead bus (LLDB) check 0 or 1
17 25.En_NoChk Enable AR without any check 0 or 1

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
7.4.1.9 Auto-reclosing Settings (79)

1 79.N_Rcls Maximum number of reclosing attempts 1~4
2 79.t_Dd_1PS1 Dead time of first shot 1-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
3 79.t_Dd_3PS1 Dead time of first shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
4 79.t_Dd_3PS2 Dead time of second shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
5 79.t_Dd_3PS3 Dead time of third shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
6 79.t_Dd_3PS4 Dead time of fourth shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
Time delay of circuit breaker in closed position before
7 79.t_CBClsd 0.000~600.000 (s)
reclosing
Time delay to wait for CB healthy, and begin to timing
when the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] is de-energized
8 79.t_CBReady 0.000~600.000 (s)
and if it is not energized within this time delay, AR will
be blocked.
9 79.t_Wait_Chk Maximum wait time for synchronism check 0.000~600.000 (s)
Time delay allow for CB status change to conform
10 79.t_Fail 0.000~600.000 (s)
reclosing successful
11 79.t_DDO_AR Pulse width of AR closing signal 0.000~600.000 (s)
12 79.t_Reclaim Reclaim time of AR 0.000~600.000 (s)
Time delay of excessive trip signal to block
13 79.t_PersistTrp 0.000~600.000 (s)
auto-reclosing
Drop-off time delay of blocking AR, when blocking
14 79.t_DDO_BlkAR signal for AR disappears, AR blocking condition drops 0.000~600.000 (s)
off after this time delay
15 79.t_AddDly Additional time delay for auto-reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
Maximum wait time for reclosing permissive signal from
16 79.t_WaitMaster 0.000~600.000 (s)
master AR
Time delay of discriminating another fault, and begin to
times after 1-pole AR initiated, 3-pole AR will be
17 79.t_SecFault 0.000~600.000 (s)
initiated if another fault happens during this time delay.
AR will be blocked if another fault happens after that.
Enable auto-reclosing blocked when a fault occurs
18 79.En_PDF_Blk 0 or 1
under pole disagreement condition
Enable auto-reclosing with an additional dead time
19 79.En_AddDly 0 or 1
delay
20 79.En_CutPulse Enable adjust the length of reclosing pulse 0 or 1
Enable confirm whether AR is successful by checking
21 79.En_FailCheck 0 or 1
CB state
22 79.En Enable auto-reclosing 0 or 1
Enable AR by external input signal besides logic setting
23 79.En_ExtCtrl 0 or 1
[79.En]
24 79.En_CBInit Enable AR be initiated by open state of circuit breaker 0 or 1

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
25 79.Opt_Priority Option of AR priority 0, 1 or 2

26 79.SetOpt Control option of AR mode 0 or 1
27 79.En_1PAR Enable 1-pole AR mode 0 or 1
28 79.En_3PAR Enable 3-pole AR mode 0 or 1
29 79.En_1P/3PAR Enable 1/3-pole AR mode 0 or 1
7.4.1.10 Trip Logic Settings

1 t_DDO_Trp The dwell time of tripping command 0.000~10.000 (s)
7.4.1.11 VTS Settings

1 VTS.t_DPU Pick-up time delay of VT circuit supervision 0.200~100.000 (s)
2 VTS.t_DDO Drop-off time delay of VT circuit supervision 0.200~100.000 (s)
3 VTS. En_Out_VT VT is not connected to the protection device 0 or 1
If three-phase voltage used for protection measurement
comes from line side (for example, 3/2 breaker), it
4 VTS.En_LineVT 0 or 1
should be set as “1”. If three-phase voltage comes from
busbar side, it should be set as “0”.
5 VTS.En Enable alarm function of VT circuit supervision 0 or 1
7.4.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsProt Settings
7.5 Logic Link Settings

The logic link settings (in the submenu “Logic Links”) are used to determine whether the relevant
function of this device is enabled or disabled. If this device supports the logic link function, it will
have a corresponding submenu in the submenu “Logic Links” for the logic link settings.
Each logic link settings is an “AND” condition of enabling the relevant function with the
corresponding binary input and logic setting. Through SAS or RTU, logic link settings can be set
as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant function can be in service or out of service through
remote command. It provides convenience for operation management.

7.5.1.1 GOOSE Link Settings
The GOOSE link settings (in the submenu “GOOSE Links”) are used to determine whether the
relevant GOOSE elements are enabled or disabled. See the GOOSE related instruction manual
for the more information and details.
7.5.1.2 Spare Link Settings
The spare link settings (in the submenu “Function Links”) are used for future application. It can
be defined as one of above three link settings through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool.

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings

1 Link_01 Spare link setting 01 0 or 1
7.5.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsLogic Links
7.6 Measurement and Control Settings

7.6.1.1 Synchronism Settings
Parameters in the “Syn Settings” menu are listed in the following table.

0~5
(0: Ua; 1: Ub;
1 MCBrd.25.Opt_Source_UL Voltage selecting mode of line
2: Uc; 3: Uab;
4: Ubc; 5: Uca)
0~5
(0: Ua; 1: Ub;
2 MCBrd.25.Opt_Source_UB Voltage selecting mode of bus
2: Uc; 3: Uab;
4: Ubc; 5: Uca)
3 MCBrd.25.U_Dd Voltage threshold of dead check 1.000~100.000 (V)
4 MCBrd.25.U_Lv Voltage threshold of live check 1.000~100.000 (V)
5 MCBrd.25.K_Usyn Compensation coefficient for synchronism voltage 0.20-5.00
6 MCBrd.25.phi_Diff Phase difference limit of synchronism check for AR 0.10~ 180.00 (Deg)
Compensation for phase difference between two

7 MCBrd.25.phi_Comp 0~360 (Deg)
Frequency difference limit of synchronism check for
8 MCBrd.25.f_Diff 0.00~3.00 (Hz)
AR
9 MCBrd.25.U_Diff Voltage difference limit of synchronism check for AR 1.000~100.000 (V)
10 MCBrd.25.En_SynChk Enable synchronism check 0 or 1

11 MCBrd.25.En_DdL_DdB Enable dead line and dead bus (DLDB) check 0 or 1
12 MCBrd.25.En_DdL_LvB Enable dead line and live bus (DLLB) check 0 or 1
13 MCBrd.25.En_LvL_DdB Enable live line and dead bus (LLDB) check 0 or 1

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
14 MCBrd.25.En_NoChk Enable AR without any check 0 or 1

Threshold of rate of frequency change between both
15 MCBrd.25.df/dt 0.10~5.00 (Hz/s)
sides of CB for synchronism-check.
Circuit breaker closing time. It is the time from
16 MCBrd.25.t_Close_CB receiving closing command pulse till the CB is 0~1000 (ms)
completely closed.
From receiving a closing command, this device will
continuously check whether between incoming
voltage and reference voltage involved in
synchronism check (or dead check) can meet the
17 MCBrd.25.t_Wait_Chk 5.000~30.000 (s)
criteria. If the synchronism check (or dead check)
criteria are not met within the duration of this time
delay, the failure of synchronism-check (or dead
check) will be confirmed.
7.6.1.2 Dual Point Binary Input Settings
Parameters in the “DPos Settings” menu are listed in the following table.
These settings are applied to configure the debouncing

1 t_DPU_Dposxx time. “DPU” is the abbreviation of “Delay Pick Up”. 0~60000 (ms)
(xx=01, 02….)
Thses settings are applied to configure the status change confirmation time for No.xx double point
binary inputs. Up to 10 virtual double point binary inputs are provided in this device.
If a double point binary input changes from normal status to invalid status, i.e.: double point error
occurs, [t_DPU_Dposxx] will be applied as the debouncing time for No.xx double point binary
input.
7.6.1.3 Control Settings
Parameters in the “Control Settings” menu are listed in the following table. (xx=01, 02….10)
No.xx holding time of a normal open contact of remote

1 t_DDO_Opnxx 0~60000 (ms)
opening CB, disconnector or for signaling purpose.
No.xx closing time of a normal open contact of remote

2 t_DDO_Clsxx 0~60000 (ms)
closing CB, disconnector or for signaling purpose.
7.6.1.4 Interlock Settings
Parameters in the “Interlock Settings” menu are listed in the following table. (xx=01, 02….10)
Enable No.xx open output of the BO module be controlled

1 En_Opnxx_Blk 0 or 1
by the interlocking logic

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings
Enable No.xx closing output of the BO module be

2 En_Clsxx_Blk 0 or 1
controlled by the interlocking logic
7.6.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsMon/Ctrl Settings

Date: 2013-02-28
7 Settings

Date: 2013-02-28
Table of Contents
8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Keypad Operation ................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.2 LED Indications.................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 Front Communication Port................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.4 Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.2 Menu Tree ........................................................................................................ 8-5

8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.2.2 Main Menus ......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.3 Sub Menus........................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.3 LCD Display ................................................................................................... 8-17

8.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-17
8.3.2 Normal Display .................................................................................................................. 8-18
8.3.3 Display Disturbance Records ............................................................................................ 8-19
8.3.4 Display Supervision Event ................................................................................................. 8-20
8.3.5 Display IO Events .............................................................................................................. 8-21
8.3.6 Display Device Logs .......................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-23

8.4.1 View Device Measurements .............................................................................................. 8-23
8.4.2 View Device Status ............................................................................................................ 8-23
8.4.3 View Device Records......................................................................................................... 8-23
8.4.4 Print Device Report ........................................................................................................... 8-24
8.4.5 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.6 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-25
8.4.7 Copy Device Setting .......................................................................................................... 8-28
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ......................................................................................................... 8-28

Date: 2013-02-28
8.4.9 Delete Device Records ...................................................................................................... 8-29
8.4.10 Remote Control................................................................................................................ 8-30
8.4.11 Modify Device Clock ........................................................................................................ 8-33
8.4.12 View Module Information ................................................................................................. 8-34
8.4.13 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-34
8.4.14 Communication Test ........................................................................................................ 8-34
8.4.15 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-35
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel .............................................................................................................. 8-1
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad buttons ...................................................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8.1-3 LED indications ...................................................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel .................................. 8-4
Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C ................................................... 8-5
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree ................................................................................................................ 8-7
List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................. 8-4
Table 8.3-1 Tripping report messages ..................................................................................... 8-20
Table 8.3-2 User operating event list ....................................................................................... 8-22

Date: 2013-02-28
The operator can access the protective device from the front panel. Local communication with the
protective device is possible using a computer via a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel.
Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using a PC with the substation automation
system via rear RS485 port or rear Ethernet port. The operator is able to check the protective
device status at any time.
This chapter describes human machine interface (HMI), and give operator an instruction about
how to display or print event report, setting and so on through HMI menu tree and display metering
value, including r.m.s. current, voltage and frequency etc. through LCD. Procedures to change
active setting group or a settable parameter value through keypad is also described in details.
NOTE!
About three measurements in menu “Measurements”, please refer to the following

description:
“Measurement1” is use to display measured values from protection calculation DSP

(displayed in secondary value)
“Measurement2” is used to display measured values from fault detector DSP (displayed
in secondary value)
“Measurement3” is used to display measured primary values and other calculated

quantities
8.1 Overview
The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows
a communication to be as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module helps to draw your
attention to something that has occurred which may activate a LED or a report displayed on the
LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the keypad.
1 11
HEALTHY PCS-9 21
2 12
5 BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION
ALARM
3 13
4 14
GRP
5 15
6 16 ENT
ESC
7 17
4
8 18
1
9 19
3
10 20
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel
The function of HMI module:

Date: 2013-02-28

A 320×240 dot matrix backlight LCD display is visible in dim lighting
1 LCD conditions. The corresponding messages are displayed when there is
operation implemented.
20 status indication LEDs, 2 LEDs are fixed as the signals of “HEALTHY”
2 LED (green) and “ALARM” (yellow), 18 LEDs are configurable with selectable
color among green, yellow and red.
3 Keypad Navigation keypad and command keys for full access to device
4 Communication port A multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC
5 Logo Type and designation and manufacturer of device
8.1.1 Keypad Operation GR

P
ENT
ESC
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad buttons
1. “ESC”:
 Cancel the operation
 Quit the current menu
2. “ENT”:
 Execute the operation
 Confirm the interface
3. “GRP”
 Activate the switching interface of setting group
4. leftward and rightward direction keys (“◄” and “►”):
 Move the cursor horizontally
 Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu
5. upward and downward direction keys (“▲” and “▼”)
 Move the cursor vertically
 Select command menu within the same level of menu
6. plus and minus sign keys (“＋” and “－”)
 Modify the value

Date: 2013-02-28
 Modify and display the message number
 Page up/down
8.1.2 LED Indications
HEALTHY
ALARM
Figure 8.1-3 LED indications
A brief explanation has been made as bellow.
LED Display Description

When the equipment is out of service or any hardware error is defected during
Off
HEALTHY self-check.
Steady Green Lit when the equipment is in service and ready for operation.
Off When equipment in normal operating condition.

ALARM
Steady Yellow Lit when VT circuit failure, CT circuit failure or other abnormal alarm is issued.
NOTE!
“HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by energizing the device and no abnormality
detected.
“ALARM” LED is turned on when abnormalities of device occurs like above mentioned
and can be turned off after abnormalities are removed except alarm report [CTS.Alm]
which can only be reset only when the failure is removed and the device is rebooted or
re-energized.
Other LED indicators with no labels are configurable and user can configure them to be lit
by signals of operation element, alarm element and binary output contact according to
requirement through PCS-Explorer software, but as drawn in figure, 2 LEDs are fixed as
the signals of “HEALTHY” (green) and “ALARM” (yellow), 18 LEDs are configurable with
selectable color among green, yellow and red.
8.1.3 Front Communication Port

There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port

Date: 2013-02-28
as well as a twisted-pair Ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is
applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.
Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel
In the above figure and the following table:
P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.
P2: To connect the twisted-pair Ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable
Terminal Device side Computer side

Core color Function
No. (Left) (Right)
1 Orange TX+ of the Ethernet port P1-1 P2-1
2 Orange & white TX- of the Ethernet port P1-2 P2-2
3 Green & white RX+ of the Ethernet port P1-3 P2-3
4 Blue TXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-4 P3-2
5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3
6 Green RX- for the Ethernet port P1-6 P2-6
7 Blue & white The ground connection of the RS-232 port. P1-7 P3-5
8.1.4 Ethernet Port Setup

MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, take NR1102C
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-5. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.
The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer)
after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”, it should be ensured that the
protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address
and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)

Date: 2013-02-28
PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”
The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled.
NR1102C
ETHERNET
Network A
Network B
SYN+
SYN-
SGND
GND
RTS
TXD
SGND
Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C
NOTE!
If using other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be
set as “1”.
8.2 Menu Tree

8.2.1 Overview
Press “▲” of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by “▲” and
“▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the previous
menu. Press “ESC” back to main menu directly. For sake of entering the command menu again, a
command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its execution. Five latest command
menus can be recorded in the quick menu. When five command menus are recorded, the latest
command menu will cover the earliest one, adopting the “first in first out” principle. It is arranged
from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus.
Press “▲” to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

Date: 2013-02-28
MainMenu
Language
Clock
Quick Menu
For the first powered protective device, there is no record in quick menu. Press “▲” to enter the
main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
Measurements
Status
Records
Settings
Print
Local Cmd
Information
Test
Clock
Language
The descriptions about menu is based on the maximized configuration, for a specific project, if
some function is not available, the corresponding submenu will hidden.
8.2.2 Main Menus

The menu of the PCS-921 is organized into main menu and submenus, much like a PC directory
structure. The menu of the PCS-921 is divided into 10 sections:

Date: 2013-02-28
Main Menu
Measurements
Status
Records
Settings
Print
Local Cmd
Information
Test
Clock
Language
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree
Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”,
“▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all main menus under menu tree of the protection device.
8.2.3 Sub Menus

8.2.3.1 Measurements
Main Menu
Measurements
Measurements1
Measurements2
Measurements3
This menu is used to display real-time measured values, including AC voltage, AC current, phase
angle and calculated quantities. These data can help users to acquaint the device’s status. This
menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section “Measurement” about the detailed
measured values.
No. Item Function description
1 Measurement1 Display measured values from protection calculation DSP (Displayed in

Date: 2013-02-28
secondary value)
Display measured values from fault detector DSP (Displayed in

2 Measurement2
secondary value)
3 Measurement3 Display measured primary values and other calculated quantities
8.2.3.2 Status
Main Menu
Status
Inputs
Contact Inputs
GOOSE Inputs
Outputs
Contact Outputs
GOOSE Outputs
Interlock Status
Superv State
Prot Superv
FD Superv
GOOSE Superv
SV Superv
This menu is used to display real time input signals, output signals and alarm signals of the device.
These data can help users to acquaint the device′s status. This menu comprises following
submenus. Please refer to Section “Signal List” about the detailed input and output signals, and
Section “Supervision Alarms” about alarm signals.
1 Inputs Display all input signal states
2 Outputs Display all output signal states
3 Superv State Display supervision alarm states
The submenu “Inputs” comprises the following command menus.

Date: 2013-02-28
1 Contact Inputs Display states of binary inputs derived from opto-isolated channels
2 GOOSE Inputs Display states of GOOSE binary inputs.
The submenu “Outputs” comprises the following command menus.
1 Contact Outputs Display states of contact binary outputs
2 GOOSE Outputs Display states of GOOSE binary outputs
3 Interlock Status Display states of interlock result of each remote control.
The submenu “Superv State” comprises the following command menus.
1 Prot Superv Display states of self-supervision signals from protection calculation DSP
2 FD Superv Display states of self-supervision signals from fault detector DSP
3 GOOSE Superv Display states of GOOSE self-supervision signals
4 SV Superv Display states of SV self-supervision signals
8.2.3.3 Records
Main Menu
Records
Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Logs
Clear_Records
This menu is used to display all kinds of records, including the disturbance records, supervision
events, binary events and device logs, so that the operator can load to view and use as the
reference of analyzing accidents and repairing the device. All records are stored in non-volatile
memory, it can still record them even if it loses its power.
This menu comprises the following submenus.

1 Disturb Records Display disturbance records of the device
2 Superv Events Display supervision events of the device
3 IO Events Display binary events of the device
4 Device Logs Display device logs of the device
5 Control Logs Display control logs of the device

Date: 2013-02-28
6 Clear Records Clear all records.
8.2.3.4 Settings
Main Menu
Settings
System Settings
Prot Settings
FD Settings
AuxE Settings
OC Settings
ROC Settings
BFP Settings
DeadZone Settings
PD Settings
VTS/CTS Settings
Trip Logic Settings
AR/Syn Settings
Copy Settings
Mon/Ctrl Settings
Syn Settings
DPos Settings
Control Settings
Interlock Settings
Logic Links
Function Links
GOOSE Links
SV Links
Spare Links
Device Setup
Device Settings
Comm Settings
Label Settings

Date: 2013-02-28
This menu is used to check the device setup, system parameters, protection settings and logic
links settings, as well as modifying any of the above setting items. Moreover, it can also execute
the setting copy between different setting groups.
1 System Settings Check or modify the system parameters
2 Prot Settings Check or modify the protection settings
3 Mon/Ctrl Settings Check or modify the measurement and control settings
Check or modify the logic links settings, including function links, SV links,
4 Logic Links
GOOSE links and spare links
5 Device Setup Check or modify the device setup
The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.
1 FD Settings Check or modify fault detector settings
2 AuxE Settings Check or modify auxiliary element settings
3 OC Settings Check or modify phase overcurrent protection settings
4 ROC Settings Check or modify residual overcurrent protection settings
5 BFP Settings Check or modify breaker failure protection settings
6 DeadZone Settings Check or modify dead zone protection settings
7 PD Settings Check or modify pole discrepancy protection settings
Check or modify VT circuit supervision and CT circuit supervision

8 VTS/CTS Settings
settings
9 Trip Logic Settings Check or modify trip logic settings
10 AR/Syn Settings Check or modify auto-reclosing and synchronism check settings
11 Copy Settings Copy setting between different setting groups
The submenu “Mon/Ctrl Settings” includes the following command menus.
1 Syn Settings Check or modify manual sysnchronism check settings
2 DPos Settings Check or modify double point binary input settings
3 Control Settings Check or modify control settings
4 Interlock Settings Check or modify interlock settings
The submenu “Logic Links” comprises the following command menus.
1 Function Links Check or modify function links settings

Date: 2013-02-28
2 GOOSE Links Check or modify GOOSE links settings
3 SV Links Check or modify SV links settings
4 Spare Links Check or modify spare links settings (used for programmable logic)
The submenu “Device Setup” comprises the following command menus.
1 Device Settings Check or modify the device settings.
2 Comm Settings Check or modify the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Check or modify the label settings of each protection element.
8.2.3.5 Print
Main Menu
Print
Device Info
Settings
System Settings
Prot Settings
Mon/Ctrl Settings
Logic Links
Device Setup
All Settings
Latest Chgd Settings
Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Status
Waveform
IEC103 Info
Cancel Print
This menu is used to print device description, settings, all kinds of records, waveform, information
related with IEC60870-5-103 protocol, channel state and channel statistic.

Date: 2013-02-28
Print the description information of the device, including software

1 Device Info
version.
Print device setup, system parameters, protection settings and logic

links settings. It can print by different classifications as well as printing all
2 Settings
settings of the device. Besides, it can also print the latest modified
settings.
3 Disturb Records Print the disturbance records
4 Superv Events Print the supervision events
5 IO Events Print the binary events
Print the current state of the device, including the sampled value of
6 Device Status
voltage and current, the state of binary inputs, setting and so on
7 Waveform Print the recorded waveform
Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN),

8 IEC103 Info information serial number (INF), general classification service group
number, and channel number (ACC)
9 Cancel Print Cancel the print command
The submenu “Settings” comprises the following submenus.
1 System Settings Print the system parameters
2 Prot Settings Print the protection settings
3 Mon/Ctrl Settings Print the measurement and control settings
4 Logic Links Print the logic links settings
5 Device Setup Print the settings related to device setup
Print all settings including device setup, system parameters, protection

6 All Settings
settings and logic links settings
7 Latest Chgd Settings Print the setting latest modified
The submenu “Prot Settings” comprises the following command menus.
1 FD Settings Print fault detector element settings
2 AuxE Settings Print auxiliary element settings
3 OC Settings Print phase overcurrent protection settings
4 ROC Settings Print directional earth-fault protection settings
5 BFP Settings Print breaker failure protection settings
6 Deadzone Settings Print dead zone settings
7 PD Settings Print pole discrepancy protection settings

Date: 2013-02-28
8 VTS/CTS Settings Print VT circuit supervision and CT circuit supervision settings
9 Trip Logic Settings Print trippling logic settings
10 AR/Syn Settings Print synchronism check and auto-reclosing settings
11 All Settings Print all settings included in “Prot Settings” submenu
The submenu “Mon/Ctrl Settings” includes the following command menus.
1 Syn Settings Print manual sysnchronism check settings
2 DPos Settings Print double point binary input settings
3 Control Settings Print control settings
4 Interlock Settings Print interlock settings
5 All Settings Print all settings included in “Mon/Ctrl Settings” submenu
The submenu “Logic Links” comprises the following command menus.
1 Function Links Print function links settings
2 GOOSE Links Print GOOSE links settings
3 SV Links Print SV links settings
4 Spare Links Print spare links settings (used for programmable logic)
5 All Settings Print all settings included in “Logic Links” submenu
The submenu “Device Setup” comprises the following command menus.
1 Device Settings Print the device settings.
2 Comm Settings Print the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Print the label settings of each protection element.
4 All Settings Print all settings included in “Device Setup” submenu

Date: 2013-02-28
8.2.3.6 Local Cmd
Main Menu
Local Cmd
Reset Target
Trig Oscillograph
Control
Download
Clear Counter
Clear AR Counter
Clear Energy Counter
This menu is used to reset the tripping relay with latch, indicator LED, LCD display, and as same
as the resetting function of binary inputs. This menu provides a method of manually recording the
current waveform data of the device under normal condition for printing and uploading SAS.
Besides, it can send out the request of program download, clear statistic information about
GOOSE SV AR and energy.
1 Reset Target Reset the local signal, indicator LED, LCD display and so on
2 Trig Oscillograph Trigger waveform recording
3 Control Manually operating to trip, close output or for signaling purpose
4 Download Send out the request of downloading program
5 Clear Counter Clear GOOSE and SV statistic data
6 Clear AR Counter Clear AR statistic data
Clear all energy metering values (i.e. PHr+_Pri, PHr-_Pri, Qr+_Pri,

7 Clear Energy Counter
QHr-_Pri)
8.2.3.7 Information
Main Menu
Information
Version Info
Board Info
In this menu, the LCD displays software information of all kinds of intelligent plug-in modules,

Date: 2013-02-28
which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and management sequence
number. Besides, plug-in module information can also be viewed.
This menu comprises the following command menus.
Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,
1 Version Info which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and
management sequence number.
2 Board Info Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.
8.2.3.8 Test
Main Menu
Test
GOOSE Comm Counter
SV Comm Counter
AR Counter
Device Test
Disturb Events
Superv Events
IO Events
This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the
protection device. It can be used to fulfill the communication test function. It is also used to
generate all kinds of reports or events to transmit to the SAS without any external input, so as to
debug the communication on site. Besides, it can also display statistic information about GOOSE
SV and AR.
1 GOOSE Counter Check communication statistics data of GOOSE
2 SV Counter Check communication statistics data of SV (Sampled Values)
3 AR Counter Check AR counters
Automatically generate all kinds of reports or events to transmit to SCADA,

including disturbance records, self-supervision events and binary events. It can
4 Device Test
realize the report uploading by different classification, as well as the uploading
of all kinds of reports
The submenu “Device Test” comprises the following submenus.

Date: 2013-02-28
View the relevant information about disturbance records (only used for
1 Disturb Events
debugging persons)
View the relevant information about supervision events (only used for
2 Superv Events
debugging persons)
View the relevant information about binary events (only used for debugging
3 IO Events
persons)
Users can respectively execute the test automatically or manually by selecting commands “All
Test” or “Select Test”.
The submenu “Disturb Events” comprises the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of all protection elements
2 Select Test Selective test of corresponding classification
The submenu “Superv Events” comprises the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of all self-supervisions
The submenu “IO Events” comprises the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs
8.2.3.9 Clock
The current time of internal clock can be viewed here. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.
8.2.3.10 Language
This menu is mainly used to set LCD display language.
8.3 LCD Display

8.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, SLD (single line diagram) display, tripping reports, alarm
reports, binary input changing reports and control reports. Tripping reports and alarm reports will
not disappear until these reports are acknowledged by pressing the “RESET” button in the
protection panel (i.e. energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg]). User can press both “ENT” and
“ESC” at the same time to switch the display among trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display.
IO events will be displayed for 5s and then it will return to the previous display interface

Date: 2013-02-28
automatically. Device logs will not pop up and can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding
menu.
8.3.2 Normal Display

After the protection device is powered and entered into the initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds
to complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization of protection device, the
“HEALTHY” indicator lamp of the protection device goes out.
The device can display single line diagram (SLD) and primary operation information, it can support
wiring configuration function. LCD configuration file can be downloaded via the network. Remote
control operating through single line diagram is also supported.
Under normal condition, the LCD will display the following interface. The LCD adopts white color
as its backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished
automatically after 60 seconds of no operation.
2010-06-08 10:10:00
Ia 0.00A
Ib 0.00A
Ic 0.00A
3I0 0.00A
Ua 0.02V
Ub 0.00V
Uc 0.00V
3U0 0.02V
UB1 0.00V
UL2 0.00V
UB2 0.00V
f_Line 50.00Hz
Addr 24343 Group 01
The content displayed on the screen contains: the current date and time of the protection device
(with a format of yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the active setting group number, the three-phase
current sampling value, the neutral current sampling value, the three-phase voltage sampling
value, the neutral voltage sampling value, the synchronism voltage sampling value, line frequency
and the address relevant to IP address of Ethernet A. If all the sampling values of the voltage and
the current can’t be fully displayed within one screen, they will be scrolling-displayed automatically
from the top to the bottom.
If IP address of Ethernet A is “xxx.xxx.a.b”, the displayed address equals to (a×256+b). For

example, If IP address of Ethernet A is “198.087.095.023”, the displayed address will be
“95×256+23=24343”.
If the device has detected any abnormal state, it′ll display the self-check alarm information.

Date: 2013-02-28
8.3.3 Display Disturbance Records

This device can store 1024 disturbance records and 64 disturbance records with fault waveform.
When there is protection element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest
disturbance record, and two kinds of LCD display interfaces will be available depending on
whether there are supervision events at present.
For the situation that the disturbance records and the supervision events coexist, the upper half
part is the disturbance record, and the lower half part is the supervision event. As to the upper half
part, it displays separately the record number of the disturbance record, fault name, generating
time of the disturbance record (with a format of yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss), protection element and
tripping element. If there is protection element operation, faulty phase and relative operation time
with reference to fault detector element are displayed. At the same time, if displayed rows of
protection element and tripping element are more than 3, a scroll bar will appear at the right. The
height of the black part of the scroll bar basically indicates the total lines of protection element and
tripping element, and its position suggests the position of the currently displayed line of the total
lines. The scroll bar of protection element and tripping element will roll up at the speed of one line
per time. When it rolls to the last three lines, it will roll from the earliest protection element and
tripping element again. The displayed content of the lower half part is similar to that of the upper
half part.
If the device has no the supervision event, the display interface will only show the disturbance
record.
1. Disturb Records NO.2

2008-11-28 07:10:00:200
0 ms FD.DPFC.Pkp
24 ms A 50/51P1.Op
If the device has the supervision event, the display interface will show the disturbance record and
the supervision event at the same time.

Date: 2013-02-28
1. Disturb Records NO.2

2008-11-28 07:10:00:200
0 ms FD.DPFC.Pkp
24 ms A 50/51P1.Op
2. Superv Events NO.3

2008-11-28 07:09:00:200
Alm_52b
Disturb Records NO.2 shows the title and SOE number of the disturbance record.
2008-11-28 07:10:00:200 shows the time when fault detector picks up, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond.
0ms FD.DPFC.Pkp shows fault detector element and its operating time (set as 0ms
fixedly).
24ms A 50/51P1.Op shows operation element and its relative operation time
All the protection elements have been listed in Chapter “Operation Theory”, and please refer to
each protection element for details. Operation reports of fault detector and the reports related to
oscillography function are showed in the following table.
Table 8.3-1 Tripping report messages
No. Message Description

1 ManTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered manually.
2 RmtTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered remotely.
8.3.4 Display Supervision Event

This device can store 1024 pieces of supervision events. During the running of the device, the
supervision event of hardware self-check errors or system running abnormity will be displayed
immediately.

Date: 2013-02-28
2. Superv Events NO.4

2008-12-29 9:18:47:500ms
Alm_52b 0 1
Superv_Events NO.4 shows the SOE number and title of the supervision event
2008-11-28 09:18:47:500 shows the real time of the report: year–month-date and
hour:minute:second:millisecond
Alm_52b 0→1 shows the content of abnormality alarm
8.3.5 Display IO Events

This device can store 1024 pieces of binary events. During the running of the device, the binary
input will be displayed once its state has changed, i.e. from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”.
3. IO Events NO.4
2008-11-29 09:18:47:500ms
BI_RstTarg 0 1
IO Events NO.4 shows the number and title of the binary event
2008-11-28 09:18:47:50 shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
BI_RstTarg 0→1 shows the state change of binary input, including binary input

Date: 2013-02-28
name, original state and final state
8.3.6 Display Device Logs

This device can store 1024 pieces of device logs. During the running of the device, the device log
will be displayed after any operation of it is conducted.
4. Device Logs NO.4

2008-11-28 10:18:47:569ms
Reboot
Device Logs NO. 4 shows the title and the number of the device log
2008-11-28 10:18:47:569 shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
Reboot shows the manipulation content of the device log
User operating information listed below may be displayed.
Table 8.3-2 User operating event list
No. Message Description

1 Reboot The device has been reboot.
2 Settings_Chg The device′s settings have been changed.
3 ActiveGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.
4 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted. (Device logs can not be deleted)
5 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.
6 Process_Exit A process has exited.
7 Counter_Cleared Clear counter
8 Signal_Reset Reset signal
It will be displayed on the LCD before the fault report and self-check report are confirmed. Only
pressing the restore button on the protection screen or pressing both “ENT” and “ESC” at the
same time can switch among the fault report, the self-check report and the normal running state of
protection device to display it. The binary input change report will be displayed for 5s and then it
will return to the previous display interface automatically.

Date: 2013-02-28
8.4 Keypad Operation

8.4.1 View Device Measurements
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;
2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;
3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the “ENT” to
enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one display
screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most);
5. Press the “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu;
6. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu);
8.4.2 View Device Status

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the “ENT”
or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press the
key “ENT” to enter the submenu.
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one display
screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).
8.4.3 View Device Records

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the “ENT” or
“►” to enter the menu;
enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down;
5. Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record;

Date: 2013-02-28
7. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu);
8.4.4 Print Device Report

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the “ENT” or “►”
to enter the menu;
enter the menu;
Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next
record. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”, and then
automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer doesn’t complete its
current print task and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press
the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the key “▲” or
“▼” to move the cursor. Press the “＋” or “－” to select the starting and ending numbers of
printing message. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and
then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit
this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
4. If selecting the command menu “Device Info”, “Device Status“ or “IEC103_Info”, press the
key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”).
5. If selecting the “Settings”, press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the next level of menu.
6. After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and then
press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. If selecting any item to printing:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select the setting group to be printed. After pressing the key
“ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning
to the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Settings”).
7. After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “＋” or “－” to select the waveform item
to be printed and press ”ENT” to enter. If there is no any waveform data, the LCD will display
“No Waveform Data!” (Before executing the command menu “Waveforms”, it is necessary to
execute the command menu “Trig Oscillograph” in the menu “Local Cmd”, otherwise the
LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”). With waveform data existing:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD
will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and

Date: 2013-02-28
the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Waveforms”).
8.4.5 View Device Setting

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the “ENT” or
enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor;
5. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down;
7. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).
NOTE!
If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side of
the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the
relative location of information where the current cursor points at.
8.4.6 Modify Device Setting

enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor;
5. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down;
7. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” );
8. If selecting the command menu “System Settings”, move the cursor to the setting item to be
modified, and then press the “ENT”;
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press the “◄” or “►”
to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value), press the

Date: 2013-02-28
“ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the displayed interface of the command menu
“System Settings”. Press the “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed
interface of the command menu “System Settings”).
Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are modified,
press the “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”. Directly press the “ESC” or
press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the “Cancel”, and then press the “ENT” to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu “System
Settings”).
Press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the “ENT”, all modified setting item
will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).
Press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the “ENT”, the LCD will
display password input interface.
Please Input Password:
____
Input a 4-bit password (“＋”, “◄”, “▲” and “－”). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it,
and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface
of the command menu “System Settings”. If the password is correct, LCD will display “Save
Setting Now…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command
menu “System Settings”), with all modified setting items as modified values.
NOTE!
For different setting items, their displayed interfaces are different but their modification
methods are the same. The following is ditto.
9. If selecting the submenu “Prot Settings”, and press “ENT” to enter. After selecting different
command menu, the LCD will display the following interface: (take “FD Settings” as an
example)

Date: 2013-02-28
FD Settings
Please Select Group for Config
Active Group : 01
Selected Group : 02
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the “ENT” to enter it. Move the cursor to
the setting item to be modified, press the “ENT” to enter.
Take the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set] as an example is selected to modify, then press the “ENT” to
enter and the LCD will display the following interface. is shown the “＋” or “－” to modify the value
and then press the “ENT” to confirm.
FD.DPFC.I_Set
Current Value 0.200
Modified Value 0.202
Min Value 0.050
Max Value 30.000
NOTE!
After modifying protection settings in current active setting group or system parameters of
the device, the “HEALTHY” indicator lamp of the device will go out, and the device will
automatically restart and re-check them. If the check doesn’t pass, the device will be
blocked.

Date: 2013-02-28
8.4.7 Copy Device Setting

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”, and then
press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
Copy Settings
Active Group: 01
Copy To Group: 02
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value. Press the “ESC”, and return to the menu “Settings”.
Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input, if the password is incorrect,
continue inputting it, press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the menu
“Settings”. If the password is correct, the LCD will display “copy setting OK!”, and exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Settings”).
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group

1. Exit the main menu;
2. Press the “GRP”

Date: 2013-02-28
Change Active Group
Active Group: 01
Change To Group: 02
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to
the main menu). After pressing the “ENT”, the LCD will display the password input interface. If the
password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input
interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the “HEALTHY” indicator lamp
of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check the protection setting. If
the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check is successful, the LCD
will return to its original state.
8.4.9 Delete Device Records

1. Exit the main menu;
2. Press the “＋”, “－”, “＋”, “－” and “ENT”; Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the
original state). Press the “ENT” to carry out the deletion.
Press <ENT> To Clear

Press <ESC> To Exit

Date: 2013-02-28
NOTE!
The operation of deleting device message will delete all messages saved by the protection
device, including disturbance records, supervision events, binary events, but not including
device logs. Furthermore, the message is irrecoverable after deletion, so the application of
the function shall be cautious.
8.4.10 Remote Control

Control operation method is introduced as below:
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Local Cmd”, and
then press the key “ENT” to enter submenus. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the
cursor to the command menu “Control”, and then press the key “ENT” to enter and the
following display will be shown on LCD.
Password:
___
Input a 3-bit password (“111”). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the
“ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface of the command
menu “Control”. If the password is correct, it will go to the following step.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the control object and press the key
“ENT” to select control object.

Date: 2013-02-28
Control
Step1: select Control Object
1. CSWI01
2. CSWI02
3. CSWI03
4. CSWI04
5. CSWI05
6. CSWI06
7. CSWI07
8. CSWI08
9. CSWI09
10. CSWI10
4. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select control command press the key “ENT” to the next step.
Three control commands are optional:
1) Open (Step down): Remote open
2) Close (Step up): Remote close
3) Stop: Reserved
CSWI01
Step2: select Control Command
Open(Step down) Close(Step up) (Stop)
NoCheck SynchroCheck DeadCheck

LoopCheck EF Line Selection
InterlockChk InterlockNotChk
Select Execute Cancle
Result
5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select synchronism check mode and press the key “ENT” to
the next step.
Five synchronism check modes are optional:
1) NoCheck: Without any check
2) SynchroCheck: Synchronism-check mode

Date: 2013-02-28
3) DeadCheck: Dead check mode
4) LoopCheck: Reserved
5) EF Line Selection: Reserved
CSWI01
Step3: select Execution Condition

InterlockChk InterlockNotChk
Result
6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select interlock mode and press the key “ENT” to next step.
Two interlock check modes are optional:
1) InterlockChk: Check interlocking criteria
2) InterlockNotChk: Not check interlocking criteria
CSWI01
Step4: select Interlock Condition

InterlockChk InterLockNotChk
Result
7. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select control type and press the key “ENT”.
As shown in the following figure, operation results will be shown after “Result” at the bottom of the
LCD.

Date: 2013-02-28
Three synchronism control types are optional:
1) Select: Select control object
2) Execute: Execute control operation
3) Cancle: Cancle control operation
CSWI01
Step5: select Control Type

InterlockChk InterLockNotChk
Result
NOTE!
“Exectue” operation must be operated after “Select” operation.
8.4.11 Modify Device Clock

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the “ENT” to
enter clock display
3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified;
4. Press the “+” or “-” to modify value, and then press the “ENT” to save the modification and
return to the main menu;
5. Press the “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.

Date: 2013-02-28
Clock
Year 2008
Month 11
Day 28
Hour 20
Minute 59
Second 14
8.4.12 View Module Information

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press the “ENT”
or “►” to enter the menu;
3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Board Info”, and then press
the “ENT” to enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar;
5. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).
8.4.13 Check Software Version

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press the “ENT”
to enter the submenu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and then
press the key “ENT” to display the software version.
4. Press the “ESC” to return to the main menu.
8.4.14 Communication Test

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

Date: 2013-02-28
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the submenu “Device Test”, and then press
the key “ENT” to enter the submenu, to select test item. If “Disturb Events” “Superv Events”
or “IO Events” is selected, two options “All Test” and “Select Test” are provided.
Prot Element
All Test
Select Test
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu “All
Test” or “Select Test”. If selecting the “All Test”, press the “ENT”, and the device will
successively carry out all operation element message test one by one.
5. If “Select Test” is selected, press the key “ENT”. Press the “＋” or “－” to page up/down, and
then press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the
corresponding protection element. Press the key “ENT” to execute the communication test of
this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the corresponding
message.
NOTE!
If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication transmission and
return to the “Test” menu, at this moment, the LCD will display “Communication Test
Timeout and Exiting...”.
Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Test”, at this moment, the LCD will
display “Communication Test Exiting…”.
8.4.15 Select Language

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Language”, and then
press the key “ENT” to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.

Date: 2013-02-28
Please Select Language:
1 中文
2 English
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the language user preferred and press the key
“ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will return
to the menu “Language”, and the display language is changed. Otherwise, press the key
“ESC” to cancel language switching and return to the menu “Language”.
NOTE!
LCD interface provided in this chapter is only a reference and available for explaining
specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual device may be some
different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual protection device.

Date: 2013-02-28
Table of Contents
9.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 9-1

9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer software ........................................................ 9-1
9.3 GOOSE Introduction ....................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3.3 Maintenance Mechanism..................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4 Signal List ........................................................................................................ 9-6

9.4.1 Input Signals ........................................................................................................................ 9-6
9.4.2 Output Signals ................................................................................................................... 9-10
List of Figures
Figure 9.3-1 Typical GOOOSE networking scheme ................................................................. 9-2
Figure 9.3-2 GOOSE send mechanism ..................................................................................... 9-3
List of Tables
Table 9.4-1 Input signals ............................................................................................................. 9-6
Table 9.4-2 Output signals ........................................................................................................ 9-10

Date: 2013-02-28

Date: 2013-02-28
9.1 General Description
By adoption of PCS-Explorer software, it is able to make device configuration, function

configuration, LCD configuration, binary input and binary output configuration, LED indicator
configuration and programming logic for PCS-921.
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer software
PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC

platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as
the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to
govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet
connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading
configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it
also supports programmable logic to meet customer’s demand.
After function configuration is finished, disabled protection function will be hidden in the device and
in setting configuration list of PCS-Explorer Software. The user can select to show or hide some
setting by this way, and modify the setting value.
Please refer to the instruction manual “PCS-Explorer Auxiliary Software” for details.
Overall functions:
 Programmable logic (off-line function)
 Device configuration (off-line function)
 Function configuration (off-line function)
 LCD configuration (off-line function)
 LED indicators configuration (off-line function)
 Binary signals configuration (off-line function)
 Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)
 Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)
 Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)
 Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)
 File downloading/uploading (on-line function)

Date: 2013-02-28
9.3 GOOSE Introduction
9.3.1 Overview
Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) is the mechanism in IEC61850 standard
used to satisfy fast message demand of substation automation system, and provides means of
fast information transmission and exchange under network communication conditions. In case of
any status change, intelligent electronic device (IED) will use change report to transmit binary
objects in high speed, i.e. GOOSE report. Information exchange among IEDs is realized by
GOOSE.
PCS-900 series features GOOSE network message interface independent of MMS message
interface and of high real-time property. Therefore, PCS-900 series can receive binary inputs via
opto-coupler and send output commands via binary output contact, as well as GOOSE input
signals, and can configure GOOSE output commands and GOOSE output signals. Configuration
of GOOSE signals is obtained by GOOSE file based on SCD file.
PCS-900 series supports single network mode and dual network mode, P2P mode and networking
mode, as well as mode based on station level network MMS or process level network. Networking
mode can be selected by parameters setup or configuration tool PCS-Explorer. For important
occasions, in order to ensure no loss of data during transmission, it is recommended to configure
dual GOOSE network in which process level is independent of station level for the protection
device. Refer to the figure as below.
Control Center
Server A/ Server B/ Engineering Maintenance GPS

Printer
Workstation Workstation Workstation Workstation
Station Level Satellite-Synchronized

Clock
Gateway
Switch Station Bus: MMS, GOOSE (Interlocking), SNTP
……
Protocol Converter
PCS-900 PCS-900 PCS-9700

Bay Level Protection Protection Bay Control Unit
Third-Party IEDs
Switch Process Bus: Sampled Value, GOOSE (Tripping/Binary Input), IEEE 1588, GMRP Clock Synchronization
PCS-221 PCS-222
Process Level Merging Unit Circuit Breaker Controller
Optical Fiber ……
Electronic/Optical CT & VT
Circuit Breaker: GIS/AIS
Figure 9.3-1 Typical GOOOSE networking scheme
The above figure shows a typical dual network mode, in which process level network is separate
from station level network, to ensure that important information (e.g. tripping signal) is not affected
by data on the MMS data network.

Date: 2013-02-28
Ring network is not recommended for GOOSE network configuration, to avoid the problem of
network storm. Duplicated protection configuration and their GOOSE networks shall be totally
independent of each other, to ensure that in case of any network fault in one set of duplicated
protection configuration, the other set will not be affected.

IEC 61850 provides substation configuration language (SCL) based on XML, which has
standardized description of substation systems and device configuration. There are four types of
SCL files:
 SSD: Substation Specification Description
 SCD: Substation Configuration Description
 ICD: IED Capability Description
 CID: Configured IED Description
Normally, manufacturers provide ICD file, system integrator prepare SCD file of the whole
substation according to design blueprints, and each IED manufacturer exports its CID file after
receiving SCD configuration model.
9.3.2.1 GOOSE Transmission
GOOSE service is directly mapped to network data link layer. To ensure important information
transmission priority, broadcast address is used for multi-channle transmission of information.
GOOSE message allows high-speed transmission of tripping signals, which has high transmission
success rate.
GOOSE message is not sent at fixed interval. When there is no GOOSE event, interval of GOOSE
message transmission is fixed and relatively long. However, after an event occurs, data
transmission will change, and the interval set for this occasion is the shortest. GOOSE adopts
continual repeated transmission to realize reliable transmission, and during this period,
transmission interval will gradually increase, till the event status becomes stable. Later, GOOSE
message transmission will be back to fixed interval. The whole process is shown as below:
Transmission Time
Event
Figure 9.3-2 GOOSE send mechanism
Where:
T0 is retransmission in stable conditions (no event for a long time), and it can be configured
(typical value is 5000ms)
T1 is the shortest retransmission time after the event, and it can be configured (typical value is

Date: 2013-02-28
2ms)
T2 is retransmission times until achieving the stable conditions time, and it is fixed at 2T1.
T3 is retransmission times until achieving the stable conditions time, and it is fixed at 4T1.
GOOSE transmission adopts retransmission mechanism and has 4 transmission times: T0, T1, T2,
and T3. After the event occurs, a frame message will be transmitted, transmitting again after
interval T1, and still transmitting after another interval T1. And then, transmitting again after
interval T2 and yet transmitting after interval T3. At this time, if no new event occurs, transmission
will continue at interval T0 again.
Data transmitted are defined by definition of GOOSE transmission dataset and GOOSE control
blocks. PCS-900 series supports transmission of 8 GOOSE control blocks at maximum. GOOSE
can transmit both binary quantities and analog quantities of not large change, e.g. temperature
and humidity.
9.3.2.2 GOOSE Reception
At maximum, PCS-900 series can receive 128 control block data, subject to control by GOOSE
Links. GOOSE reception control block is controlled by GOOSE links of corresponding serial
number, and provides corresponding alarm signal of the same serial number.
After the receiver receives GOOSE data, if GOOSE data is invalid (refer to section 9.3.2.3), the
GOOSE data shall be processed accordingly, i.e. clear (zero), force to 1, or keep.
9.3.2.3 Invalid GOOSE Data
In case of any of the following, invalid GOOSE data will be reported:
1. The next frame of GOOSE message is not received within 1.1 times of maximum message
survival time
2. GOOSE reception link is disabled
3. Inconsistent version No. or mismatching dataset data
4. Device test mode is inconsistent with message “Test” state
NOTE!
Each frame of transmitted GOOSE data includes maximum message survival time,
normally 2 times of GOOSE heartbeat time (t0)
“Test” state of GOOSE message is set to 1 if the reception control block receives message
with “Test” bit, otherwise it is set to 0 if message without “Test” bit is received.
9.3.2.4 GOOSE Data Link Disconnection
If GOOSE message is not received within 2 times of maximum message survival time, GOOSE
link disconnection will be reported. For example, receiver sets GOOSE heartbeat time (t0) to 5s,

Date: 2013-02-28
so that specified message survival time in transmitted message is 10s. After GOOSE receives one
frame of message, if the next frame is not received within 11s, , GOOSE data is invalid. If not
received in 20s (2 times of message survival time), GOOSE link disconnection will be reported.
If invalid data or data link disconnection is tested by unplugging network wire, note that since
network line disconnection occurs at any time between two groups of heartbeat messages, invalid
GOOSE data is normally reported in 6~11s after actual disconnection, and GOOSE network link
disconnection is normally reported in 15~20s after actual disconnection.
NOTE!
Invalid GOOSE data is not synchronized with GOOSE link disconnection in time. The
former is reported when message is not received within 1.1 times maximum message
survival time, while the latter is only reported when message is not received within 2 times
maximum message survival time.
9.3.2.5 GOOSE Message Handling Mechanism under Network Storm
This device features fast detection of network storm and fast handling of network messages. In
case of network storm in single network, this device can ensure no loss of normal network
messages, and protection functions will not be affected.
In case of network storm in dual network, this device can maintain reception and handling of
messages in one of the networks, and actual test has shown that protection functions are basically
not affected.
9.3.3 Maintenance Mechanism

For important GOOSE output signal, such as, tripping, reclosing, breaker failure etc., it is
selectable whether they are controlled by “Start” signal, which is monitoring signal of GOOSE
output, and provided by fault detector DSP and separated from protection DSP, to ensure reliability
of output signals.
GOOSE reception and transmission message provide a “Test” bit. The receiver will compare this
“Test” bit in received message with its own “Test” bit. If they are consistent, operation will occur,
otherwise, invalid GOOSE data will be reported (refer to section 9.3.2.3). This eliminates mutual
effect between device in operation and device in maintainence.
Different from traditional contact signals, which can can be set to enable/disable corresponding
signals, PCS-900 series adopts the following modes to enable and disable corresponding signals
including “Test” state.
1. When the “Test” bit in GOOSE message is consistent with the “Test” of the receiver, GOOSE
data is valid, otherwise it is invalid (refer to section 9.3.2.3). In this way, the device in service
and device in maintainence do not affect each other.
2. In “Test” state, the receiver still has event recording and state display functions, to facilitate
check of circuit.

Date: 2013-02-28
3. GOOSE logic link is provided to solve the problem of selective transmission of signals.
Transmitter can be isolated from receiver by disabling relevant GOOSE logic link. The setup
of transmission and reception logic links can be consistent with traditional logic links.
4. For transmitter, GOOSE element will perform AND of data value and transmission logic link
state, and then detect change of data, so as to decide activation of a new round of
transmission flow.
9.4 Signal List
9.4.1 Input Signals

All input signals for this device are listed in the following table.
If a input signal is gray in PCS-Explorer, it means the input signal is not configurable. If a input
signal is dark in PCS-Explorer, it means the input signal is configurable.
Table 9.4-1 Input signals

Circuit Breaker Position
1 52b_PhA Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase A of corresponding circuit breaker
2 52b_PhB Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of corresponding circuit breaker
3 52b_PhC Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase C of corresponding circuit breaker
4 52b Normally closed contact of three-phase of circuit breaker
Auxiliary element
Current change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary
5 AuxE.OCD.En
Current change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary
6 AuxE.OCD.Blk
7 AuxE.ROC1.En
8 AuxE.ROC1.Blk
9 AuxE.ROC2.En
10 AuxE.ROC2.Blk
11 AuxE.ROC3.En
12 AuxE.ROC3.Blk
13 AuxE.OC1.En
14 AuxE.OC1.Blk

Date: 2013-02-28

15 AuxE.OC2.En
16 AuxE.OC2.Blk
17 AuxE.OC3.En
18 AuxE.OC3.Blk
Voltage change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary
19 AuxE.UVD.En
Voltage change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary
20 AuxE.UVD.Blk
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered
21 AuxE.UVG.En
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered
22 AuxE.UVG.Blk
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered
23 AuxE.UVS.En
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered
24 AuxE.UVS.Blk
Residual voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary
25 AuxE.ROV.En
Residual voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary
26 AuxE.ROV.Blk
Phase Overcurrent Protection
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from
27 50/51Px.En1
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from
28 50/51Px.En2
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from
29 50/51Px.Blk
Earth-fault Protection
Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary
30 50/51Gx.En1
Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
31 50/51Gx.En2
Stage x of earth fault protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
32 50/51Gx.Blk
Dead Zone Protection
33 50DZ.En1
34 50DZ.En2

Date: 2013-02-28
Dead zone protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or

35 50DZ.Blk
36 50DZ.Init Initiation signal input of the dead zone protection.
37 50BF.ExTrp3P_L Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from line protection
Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from generator or transformer
38 50BF.ExTrp3P_GT
protection
39 50BF.ExTrpA Input signal of phase-A tripping contact from external device
40 50BF.ExTrpB Input signal of phase-B tripping contact from external device
41 50BF.ExTrpC Input signal of phase-C tripping contact from external device
Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from external device. Once it is
42 50BF.ExTrp_WOI energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in
addition to breaker failure current check to trigger breaker failure timers.
Breaker failure protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
43 50BF.En
Breaker failure protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
44 50BF.Blk
Pole Discrepancy Protection
Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input
45 62PD.En1
Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input
46 62PD.En2
Pole discrepancy protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
47 62PD.Blk
48 62PD.In_PD Pole discrepancy binary input
Synchronism Check
49 25.Blk_Chk Input signal of blocking synchrocheck function for AR.
Input signal of blocking synchronism check for AR. If the value is “1”, the
50 25.Blk_SynChk
output of synchronism check is “0”.
51 25.Blk_DdChk Input signal of blocking dead charge check for AR.
Input signal of starting synchronism check, usually it was starting signal of AR
52 25.Start_Chk
from auto-reclosing module.
53 25.Blk_VTS_UB VT circuit supervision (UB) is blocked
54 25.Blk_VTS_UL VT circuit supervision (UL) is blocked
55 25.MCB_VT_UB Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UB)
56 25.MCB_VT_UL Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UL)
Auto-reclosure
Binary input for enabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1, enabling
57 79.En
AR will be controlled by the external signal via binary input
Binary input for disabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1, disabling
58 79.Blk
AR will be controlled by the external input
59 79.Sel_1PAR Input signal for selecting 1-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker
60 79.Sel_3PAR Input signal for selecting 3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker

Date: 2013-02-28
61 79.Sel_1P/3PAR Input signal for selecting 1/3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker
62 79.Trp Input signal of single-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
63 79.Trp3P Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
64 79.TrpA Input signal of A-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
65 79.TrpB Input signal of B-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
66 79.TrpC Input signal of C-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with the operating
67 79.LockOut signals of definite-time protection, transformer protection and busbar
differential protection, etc.
68 79.PLC_Lost Input signal of indicating the alarm signal that signal channel is lost
Input signal of waiting for reclosing permissive signal from master AR (when
69 79.WaitMaster
reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to perform
70 79.CB_Healthy
the close function
71 79.Clr_Counter Clear the reclosing counter
72 79.Ok_Chk Synchrocheck condition of AR is met
Trip Logic
73 TrpOut.En Trip enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.
74 TrpOut.Blk Trip blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.
75 Op_CBProt breaker tripping elements except line fault
Input signal of permitting three-phase tripping
76 PrepTrp3P When this signal is valid, three-phase tripping will be adopted for any kind of
faults.
VT Circuit Supervision
VT supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
77 VTS.En
VT supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
78 VTS.Blk
VT neutral point supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
79 VTNS.En
VT neutral point supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
80 VTNS.Blk
81 VTS.MCB_VT Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact
CT Circuit Supervision
CT circuit supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
82 CTS.En
CT circuit supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
83 CTS.Blk
Control and Synchrocheck for Manual Closing
84 CSWIxx.CILO.EnOpn It is the interlock status of No.xx open output of BO module (xx=01~10)
85 CSWIxx.CILO.EnCls It is the interlock status of No.xx closing output of BO module (xx=01~10)

From receiving a closing command, this device will continuously check
86 Sig_Ok_Chk
whether the 2 voltages (Incoming voltage and reference voltage) involved in

Date: 2013-02-28
synchronism check(or dead check) can meet the criteria.

Within the duration of [MCBrd.25.t_Wait_Chk], if the synchronism check(or
dead check) criteria are not met, [Sig_Ok_Chk] will be set as “0”; if the
synchronism check(or dead check) criteria are met, [Sig_Ok_Chk] will be set
as “1”.
Access the menu “Local Cmd→Control” to issue control command locally.
It is used to select the local control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).
87 CSWIxx.Cmd_LocCtrl
When the local control is active, No.xx binary outputs can only be locally
controlled.
It is used to select the remote control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).
88 CSWIxx.Cmd_RmtCtrl When the remote control is active, No.xx binary outputs can only be remotely
controlled by SCADA or control centers.
It is used to disable the interlock blocking function for control output. If the
89 CSWIxx.CILO.Disable signal “CSWIxx.CILO.Disable” is “1”, No.xx binary outputs of the device will
not be blocked by interlock conditions.
It is used to select the remote control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).
90 BIinput.RmtCtrl When the remote control is active, all binary outputs can only be remotely
controlled by SCADA or control centers.
It is used to select the local control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).
91 BIinput.LocCtrl When the local control is active, all binary outputs can only be locally
controlled.
It is used to disable the interlock blocking function for control output. If the
92 BIinput.CILO.Disable signal “CSWIxx.CILO.Disable” is “1”, all binary outputs of this device will not
be blocked by interlock conditions.
When the condition of local control is met and the signal
93 CSWI01.ManSynCls “CSWI01.ManSynCls” is “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlCls01] is closed to
execute manually closing the circuit breaker with synschrochcek.
When the condition of local control is met and the signal “CSWI01.ManOpn” is
94 CSWI01.ManOpn “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlOpn01] is closed to execute manually open the
circuit breaker.
9.4.2 Output Signals

All output signals for this device have been listed in the following table.
If a output signal is gray in PCS-Explorer, it means the output signal is not configurable. If a output
signal is dark in PCS-Explorer, it means the output signal is configurable.
Table 9.4-2 Output signals
No. Signal Description

Circuit Breaker Position
1 Alm_52b CB position is abnormal
Fault Detector
2 FD.Pkp The device picks up
3 FD.DPFC.Pkp DPFC current fault detector element operates.

Date: 2013-02-28
4 FD.ROC.Pkp Residual current fault detector element operates.

Auxiliary element
5 AuxE.St Any auxiliary element of the device operates
6 AuxE.OCD.St_Ext Current change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).
7 AuxE.OCD.On Current change auxiliary element is enabled
29 AuxE.UVD.St Voltage change auxiliary element operates.
30 AuxE.UVD.St_Ext Voltage change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).
31 AuxE.UVD.On Voltage change auxiliary element is enabled
32 AuxE.UVG.St Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates.
33 AuxE.UVG.StA Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase A).
34 AuxE.UVG.StB Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase B).
35 AuxE.UVG.StC Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase C).
36 AuxE.UVG.On Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element is enabled
37 AuxE.UVS.St Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates.
38 AuxE.UVS.StAB Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase AB).
39 AuxE.UVS.StBC Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase BC).
40 AuxE.UVS.StCA Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase CA).
41 AuxE.UVS.On Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element is enabled
42 AuxE.ROV.St Residual voltage auxiliary element operates.
43 AuxE.ROV.On Residual voltage auxiliary element is enabled
Phase Overcurrent Protection
44 50/51Px.En Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is enabled

Date: 2013-02-28
45 50/51Px.St Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts

46 50/51Px.StA Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase).
47 50/51Px.StB Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (B-Phase).
48 50/51Px.StC Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (C-Phase).
49 50/51Px.Op Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates
Earth-fault Protection
50 50/51Gx.En Stage x of residual overcurrent protection is enabled.
51 50/51Gx.St Stage x of residual overcurrent protection starts.
52 50/51Gx.Op Stage x of residual overcurrent protection operates.
Dead Zone Protection
53 50DZ.En Dead zone protection is enabled.
54 50DZ.St Dead zone protection starts.
55 50DZ.Op Dead zone protection operates.
56 50BF.En Breaker failure protection is enabled
57 50BF.Op_ReTrpA Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker
58 50BF.Op_ReTrpB Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker
59 50BF.Op_ReTrpC Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker
60 50BF.Op_ReTrp3P Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit breaker
Pole Discrepancy Protection
63 62PD.En Pole discrepancy protection is enabled
64 62PD.St Pole discrepancy protection starts
65 62PD.Op Pole discrepancy protection operates to trip
Synchronism Check
70 Invalid_Sel Voltage selection is invalid.
To indicate that frequency difference condition for synchronism check of AR is
71 25.Ok_fDiffChk
met, frequency difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.f_Diff].
To indicate that voltage difference condition for synchronism check of AR is
72 25.Ok_UDiffChk
met, voltage difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.U_Diff]
To indicate phase difference condition for synchronism check of AR is met,
73 25.Ok_phiDiffChk
phase difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.phi_Diff].
74 25.Ok_DdL_DdB Dead line and dead bus condition is met
75 25.Ok_DdL_LvB Dead line and live bus condition is met
76 25.Ok_LvL_DdB Live line and dead bus condition is met
77 25.Chk_LvL Line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]
78 25.Chk_DdL Line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]
79 25.Chk_LvB Bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]

Date: 2013-02-28
80 25.Chk_DdB Bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]

81 25.Ok_DdChk To indicate that dead charge check condition of AR is met
82 25.Ok_SynChk To indicate that synchronism check condition of AR is met
83 25.Ok_Chk To indicate that synchrocheck condition of AR is met
84 25.Alm_VTS_UB Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UB)
85 25.Alm_VTS_UL Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UL)
Auto-reclosure
86 79.On Automatic reclosure is enabled
87 79.Off Automatic reclosure is disabled
88 79.Close Output of auto-reclosing signal
89 79.Ready Automatic reclosure have been ready for reclosing cycle
90 79.AR_Blkd Automatic reclosure is blocked
91 79.Active Automatic reclosing logic is actived
92 79.Inprog Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress
93 79.Inprog_1P The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress
94 79.Inprog_3P 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
95 79.Inprog_3PS1 First 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
96 79.Inprog_3PS2 Second 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
97 79.Inprog_3PS3 Third 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
98 79.Inprog_3PS4 Fourth 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will be sent to slave (when
99 79.WaitToSlave
reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
100 79.Prem_Trp1P Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device operates
101 79.Prem_Trp3P Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device operates
Automatic reclosure status (0: AR is ready; 1: AR is in progress; 2: AR is

102 79.Rcls_Status
successful)
103 79.Fail_Rcls Auto-reclosing fails
104 79.Succ_Rcls Auto-reclosing is successful
105 79.Fail_Chk Synchrocheck for AR fails
108 79.Mode_1/3PAR Output of 1/3-pole AR mode
Tripping Logic
109 TrpOut.En Trip output is enabled
110 TrpA Tripping phase-A circuit breaker
111 TrpB Tripping phase-B circuit breaker
112 TrpC Tripping phase-C circuit breaker
113 Trp Tripping any phase of circuit breaker
114 Trp3P Tripping three-phase circuit breaker
VT Circuit Supervision
115 VTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT circuit fails
116 VTNS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT neutral point fails

Date: 2013-02-28
CT Circuit Supervision
117 CTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate CT circuit fails
Control and Synchrocheck for Manual Closing
118 CSWIxx.Op_Opn No.xx command output for open. (xx=01~10)
119 CSWIxx.Op_Cls No.xx command output for closing. (xx=01~10)
120 BIinput.RmtCtrl In order to be convenient to user configure control output, three same output
signals with input signals are available. The relationship with 10 binary output
121 BIinput.LocCtrl
have been configured inside the device. The user only assigns a specific
binary input to input signal, the relevant function can be gained. If some
122 BIinput.CILO.Disable binary output need not be controlled by three signals, please cancle the
configuration by PCS-Explorer, and configure it independently.

Date: 2013-02-28
10 Communications
10 Communications
Table of Contents
10.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-3
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication .................................................................................... 10-4
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................... 10-4
10.3.2 Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.3.1 Time Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.2 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................ 10-5
10.3.3 General Interrogation....................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.4 General Service ............................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.5 Disturbance Records ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6

10.4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.2 Communication Profiles................................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment ................................................................... 10-7
10.4.4 Server Data Organization ...............................................................................................10-11
10.4.5 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................... 10-13
10.4.6 ACSI Conformance ........................................................................................................ 10-15
10.4.7 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................ 10-18
10.5 DNP3.0 Interface........................................................................................ 10-21

10.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-21
10.5.2 Link Layer Functions ..................................................................................................... 10-21
10.5.3 Transport Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-21

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
10.5.4 Application Layer Functions .......................................................................................... 10-21
List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-3
Figure 10.4-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ......................... 10-8
Figure 10.4-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance ....................... 10-9
Figure 10.4-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances .................. 10-10

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
10.1 Overview
This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR Relays. The protective device
supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet),
selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective device is
indicated in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices
can be “daisy chained” together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.
It should be noted that the descriptions in this section do not aim to fully introduce the protocol
itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred for this information. This
section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a
ground terminal for earth shield of communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data
communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a remote control
center.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so an external termination resistor is required when it is located at the bus terminus.

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
EIA RS-485
Master 120 Ohm
120 Ohm
Slave Slave Slave
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements
10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies
The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable i.e.
the communications bus. Stubs and tees are strictly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop bus
topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must
not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally
at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the
cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. The signal ground shall not be connected to the cables screen or to
the product’s chassis at any stage. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state due to inactively driven of tubs. This can occur when all the slaves
are in receive mode and the master unit is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. The
reason is that the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high impedance state,
until it has something to transmit. Jabber can result in the loss of first bits of the first character in
the packet for receiving device(s), which will lead to the rejection of messages for slave units,
causing non-responding between master unit and slave unit. This could brings poor response
times (due to retries), increase in message error counters, erratic communications, and even a
complete failure to communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines shall be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V.
There should be only one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection
point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Please
note that some devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias that the external
components will not be required.
NOTE!

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so will
result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume responsibility for
any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a result of incorrect
application of this voltage.
Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic inputs)
as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
to each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the menu
“Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”.
10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable
10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies
Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star
structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also
connected to the exchanger acting as the master station, and every device which has been
connected to the exchanger will act as a slave unit.
SCADA
Switch: Net A
Switch: Net B
……
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration of IEC60870-5-103 protocol is
using a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports an
Ethernet for communication between devices. The relay operates as a slave unit in the system to
respond commands received from master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective
device must be configured by using keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu “Comm
Settings”, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B] and [Baud_RS485]. To use
the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the IP address and the submask of each
Ethernet port shall be set in the same submenu. Please refer to the corresponding section in
Chapter “Settings” for further details.
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface and the
protective device is the slave device.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
 Initialization (reset)
 Time synchronization
 Event record extraction
 General interrogation
 General commands
 Disturbance records
10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.
10.3.2 Initialization
When the protective device is powered up, or the communication parameters are changed, a reset
command is required to initialize the communications. The protective device will respond to either
of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference is that the Reset CU will clear
any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.
10.3.1 Time Synchronization

The time and date of protective device can be set by time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103 will be
corrected in the protective device. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm
message, then the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the
time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronization class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input, the protection device will not
be able to set the time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. For attempt to set the time via the
interface, the protective device will create an event with the date and time taken from the IRIG-B
synchronized internal clock.
10.3.2 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized by the following information:
 Type identification (TYP)
 Function type (FUN)
 Information number (INF)
Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103

protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and
status of binary signal and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause
of transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.
The complete list of all events produced by the protective device can be printed by choosing the
submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.
10.3.3 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers
that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the
IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.
10.3.4 General Service

The general functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the device,
and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more
details about generic functions, please see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
Generic service group numbers supported by the relay can be printed by the submenu “IEC103
Info” in the menu “Print”.

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
10.3.5 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to 64 disturbance records in its memory. Pickup of fault
detector or operation of relay will be stored as disturbance recorders in the protective device.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
All channel numbers (ACC) of disturbance data can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
“IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.
10.4 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol
10.4.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
device to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
 IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
 IEC 61850-2: Glossary
 IEC 61850-3: General requirements
 IEC 61850-4: System and project management
 IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
 IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs
 IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Principles
and models
 IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
 IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Common
data classes
 IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Compatible
logical node classes and data classes
 IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
 IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
10.4.2 Communication Profiles

The PCS-900 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication
protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-900 series to have an IP address to establish
communications. These addresses are located in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm
Settings”.
1. MMS protocol
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2. Client/server
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such
as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay controllers.
3. Peer-to-peer
This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation

equipment, such as protection relays, intelligent terminal. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer
communication.
4. Substation configuration language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED and communication
system realized according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IED
Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single
line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation
configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the
combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add communication system
parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the connection relationship of
GOOSE and SV to SCD file.
10.4.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment

To enhance the stability and reliability of SAS, dual-MMS Ethernet is widely adopted. This section
is applied to introduce the details of dual-MMS Ethernet technology. Generally, single-MMS

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of 110kV and lower voltage levels, while
dual-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of voltage levels above 110kV.
Client-server mode is adopted: clients (SCADA, control center and etc.) communicate with the
IEDs via MMS communication network, and the IEDs operate as the servers. IEDs are connected
to clients passively, and they can interact with the clients according to the configuration and the
issued command of the clients.
Three modes for dual-MMS Ethernet (abbreviated as dual-net) are provided as below.
NOTE!
Hereinafter, the normal operation status of net means the physical link and TCP link are
both ok. The abnormal operation status of net means physical link or TCP link is broken.
1) Mode 1: Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same RCB instance
Client Client
Net A Net B Net A Net B
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1
RptEna = true RptEna = true
Report Control Block Report Control Block

IED (Server) IED (Server)
Normal operation status Abnormal operation status
TCP Link
MMS Link
Figure 10.4-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance
Net A and Net B share the same report control block (abbreviated as RCB) enabled by the client.
IED sends undifferentiated date through dual-net to the clients. If one net is physically
disconnected, the flag of RCB instance (i.e.: “RptEna” in above figure) is still “true”. Only when
both Net A and Net B are disconnected, the flag of the RCB instance will automatically change to
“false”.
In normal operation status of mode 1, IED provides the same MMS service for Net A and Net B. If
one net is physically disconnected (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in above figure), the working
mode will switch to single-net mode seamlessly and immediately. Network communication
supervision is unnecessary here, and Buffered Report Control Block (abbreviated as BRCB) need

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
not to be used. On the other net, date alternation works normally. Therefore, MMS service can
interact normally without interruption. This mode ensures no data loss during one net is in
abnormal operation status.
In mode 1, one report will be transmitted twice via dual nets for the same report instance, so the
client needs to distinguish whether two reports are same according to corresponding EntryIDs.
2) Mode 2: Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance
Client Client
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1
RptEna = true RptEna = true

Normal operation status Abnormal operation status
TCP Link
Main MMS Link
Standby MMS Link
Figure 10.4-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance
In mode 2, the MMS service is provided on main MMS link, no MMS service interacts on the
standby MMS link. The definitions of two links are as follows:
 Main MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service available.
 Standby MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service not
available.
If the main net fails to operate (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in the above figure), the IED will
set “RptEna” to “false”. Meanwhile the client will detect the failure by heartbeat message or
“keep-alive”, it will automatically enable the RCB instance by setting “RptEna” back to “true”
through standby MMS link. By the buffer function of BRCB, the IED can provide uninterrupted
MMS service on the standby net. However, the differences of BRCB standards among different
manufacturers may cause data loss. Moreover, if duration of net switch is too long, the data loss is
positively as the capacity of BRCB’s buffer function is limited.

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
NOTE!
In mode 1 and mode 2, Net A IED host address and Net B IED host address must be the
same. E.g.: if the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, network prefix of Net A is 198.120.0.0,
network prefix of Net B is 198.121.0.0, Net A IP address of the IED is 198.120.1.2, and
then Net B IP address of the IED must be configured as 198.121.1.2, i.e.: Net A IED host
address =1x256+2=258, Net B IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net A IED host address
equals to Net B IED host address.
3) Mode 3: Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
Client Client
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2 Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2
RptEna = true RptEna = true RptEna = false RptEna = true

TCP Link
MMS Link
Figure 10.4-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
In mode 3, IED provides 2 report instances for each RCB, Net A and Net B work independently
from each other, failures of one net will not affect the other net at all.
In this mode, 2 report instances are required for each client. Therefore, the IED may be unable to
provide enough report instances if there are too many clients.
Net A and Net B send the same report separately when they operates normally, To ensure no
repeated data is saved into database, massive calculation is required for the client.
Moreover, accurate clock synchronization of the IED is required to distinguish whether 2 reports
are the same report according to the timestamps. Clock synchronization error of the IED may lead
to report loss/redundancy.
As a conclusion:
In mode 2, it’s difficult to realize seamless switchover between dual nets;

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
In mode 3, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if too many clients are
applied on site.
For the consideration of client treatment and IED implementation, mode 1 (Dual-net full duplex
mode sharing the same report instance) is recommended for MMS communication network
deployment.
10.4.4 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains common
information about the IED logical device.
10.4.4.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-900 series relays to provide access to digital status
points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags.
The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status
points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status
values from the PCS-900 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting
features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display
screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability
reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted
to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block
(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.4.4.2 Analog Values
Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the else in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from a IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides
data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects
are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding
unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the
following data for each source:
 MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
10.4.4.3 Protection Logical Nodes
The following list describes the protection elements for PCS-921 series relays. The specified relay
will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
 PPDP: Pole discrepancy
 PTOC: Phase overcurrent, earth fault overcurrent
 PSCH: Protection scheme
 RBRF:Breaker failure
 RREC: Automatic reclosing
 RSYN: Synchronism-check
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PTOC1 is “PTOC1.ST.Op.general”. For
PCS-921 series relays protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for
the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is
reported via BRCB, and BRCB also locates in LLN0.
10.4.4.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. In
PCS-900 series relays, besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical
nodes below in the IEDs:
 MMXU: This LN shall be used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
such as r.m.s. values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage and
current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes such as power
flow supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The requested
accuracy for these functions has to be provided.
 LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.
 PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or
alternatively, any combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to
a new “operate” of PTRC.
 RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers fault wave recorder and its output refers to
the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System”
(IEC 60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording and independent of the
trigger mode.
10.4.5 Server Features and Configuration

10.4.5.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks are located in LLN0, they can be
configured to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes),
binary status values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and
MSQI). The reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via
an IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
 TrgOps: Trigger options.
The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Data-change
－ Bit 4: Integrity
－ Bit 5: General interrogation
 OptFlds: Option Fields.
The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Sequence-number
－ Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
－ Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
－ Bit 4: Data-set-name
－ Bit 5: Data-reference
－ Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
－ Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 8: Conf-revision
－ Bit 9: Segmentation
 IntgPd: Integrity period.
 BufTm: Buffer time.
10.4.5.2 File Transfer
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from
a PCS-900 series relay.
10.4.5.3 Timestamps
The Universal Time Coordinated(UTC for short) timestamp associated with all IEC61850 data
items represents the lastest change time of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
10.4.5.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:
 A five or six-character name prefix.
 A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
 A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.
10.4.5.5 GOOSE Services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.
The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE link
settings in device.
The PCS-900 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-900 series relays.

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.
10.4.6 ACSI Conformance

10.4.6.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-900 Series

Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) － C1 Y
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 － N
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Y Y Y
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used Y N Y
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side － O Y
B32 Subscriber side O － Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side － O N
B42 Subscriber side O － N
Where:
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays
10.4.6.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-900 Series

M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y N
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y
Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
10.4.6.3 ACSI Services Fonformance Statement
Services Server/Publisher PCS-921

Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O Y
S14 CreateDataSet O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y
S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24 Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M N
S24-3 data-update M N
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Unbuffered report control block

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M N
S27-3 data-update M N
S28 GetURCBValues M Y
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O N
S31 SetLCBValues O N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O N
S33 QueryLogAfter O N
S34 GetLogStatusValues O N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y
S36 GetGoReference O Y
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M N
Control
S51 Select O N
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O Y
S56 TimeActivated-Operate O N
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O N
S59 DeleteFile O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y
10.4.7 Logical Nodes

The PCS-921 series relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table.
Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes PCS-921 Series

L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Physical device information YES

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
LLN0: Logical node zero YES

P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential －
PDIR: Direction comparison －
PDIS: Distance －
PDOP: Directional overpower －
PDUP: Directional underpower －
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency －
PHAR: Harmonic restraint －
PHIZ: Ground detector －
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent －
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition －
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －
POPF: Over power factor －
PPAM: Phase angle measuring －
PSCH: Protection scheme YES
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －
PTEF: Transient earth fault －
PTOC: Time overcurrent YES
PTOF: Overfrequency －
PTOV: Overvoltage －
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES
PTTR: Thermal overload －
PTUC: Undercurrent －
PPDP: Pole discrepancy YES
PTUV: Undervoltage －
PUPF: Underpower factor －
PTUF: Underfrequency －
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －
PVPH: Volts per Hz －
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －
RDRS: Disturbance record handling －
RBRF: Breaker failure YES
RDIR: Directional element －
RFLO: Fault locator YES
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking －
RREC: Autoreclosing YES
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing YES

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
C: Logical Nodes For Control

CALH: Alarm handling －
CCGR: Cooling group control －
CILO: Interlocking －
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －
CSWI: Switch controller －
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control YES
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application －
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving －
IHMI: Human machine interface －
ITCI: Telecontrol interface －
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface －
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator －
ARCO: Reactive power control －
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller －
AVCO: Voltage control －
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements －
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics －
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic －
MMTR: Metering －
MMXN: Non phase related measurement －
MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance －
MSTA: Metering statistics －
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) －
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer YES
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －
YLTC: Tap changer －
YPSH: Power shunt －
YPTR: Power transformer －

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment

ZAXN: Auxiliary network －
ZBAT: Battery －
ZBSH: Bushing －
ZCAB: Power cable －
ZCAP: Capacitor bank －
ZCON: Converter －
ZGEN: Generator －
ZGIL: Gas insulated line －
ZLIN: Power overhead line －
ZMOT: Motor －
ZREA: Reactor －
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －
ZSAR: Surge arrestor －
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter －
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －
10.5 DNP3.0 Interface
10.5.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 3. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports at the rear side of
this relay. The Ethernet ports are optional: electrical or optical.
10.5.2 Link Layer Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.
10.5.3 Transport Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
10.5.4 Application Layer Functions

10.5.4.1 Time Synchronization
1. Time delay measurement
Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier

Master 0x17 - - -
Slave 0x81 0x34 0x02 0x07

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
2. Read time of device

Master 0x01 0x34 0x00, 0x01 0x07-
Slave 0x81 0x32 0x01 0x07
3. Write time of device

Master 0x02 0x32 0x01 0x00, 0x01, 0x07, 0x08
Slave 0x81 - - -
10.5.4.2 Supported Writing Functions
1. Write time of device
See Section 10.5.4.1 for the details.
2. Reset the CU (Reset IIN bit7)

Master 0x02 0x50 0x01 0x00, 0x01
Slave 0x81 - - -
10.5.4.3 Supported Reading Functions
1. Supported qualifiers
Master Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x06 0x07 0x08

Slave Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x01 0x07 0x08
2. Supported objects and variations
 Object 1, Binary inputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02
The protection operation signals, alarm signals and binary input state change signals are
transported respectively according to the variation sequence in above table.
 Object 2, SOE
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03

Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02 0x03
If the master qualifier is “0x07”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x27”; and if the master
qualifier is “0x01”, “0x06” or “0x08”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x28”.
 Object 30, Analog inputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04

Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications
The measurement values are transported firstly, and then the measurement values are
transported.
 Object 40, Analog outputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02
The protection settings are transported in this object.
 Object 50, Time Synchronization
See Section 10.5.4.1 for the details.
3. Class 0 data request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 0 data request and the variation is “0x01”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 30” and “Object 40” (see
“Supported objects and variations” in Section 10.5.4.3).
4. Class 1 data request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 1 data request and the variation is “0x02”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 2” (see “Supported objects and
variations” in Section 10.5.4.3).
5. Multiple object request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the multiple object request and the variation is “0x01”,
“0x02”, “0x03” and “0x04”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 2”, “Object 30” and “Object
40” (see “Supported objects and variations” in Section 10.5.4.3).
10.5.4.4 Remote Control Functions
The function code 0x03 and 0x04 are supported in this relay. The function code 0x03 is for the
remote control with selection; and the function code 0x04 is for the remote control with execution.
The selection operation must be executed before the execution operation, and the single point
control object can be supported to this relay.
Master Qualifier 0x17 0x27 0x18 0x28

Slave Qualifier 0x17 0x27 0x18 0x28
The “Object 12” is for the remote control functions.
Master Variation 0x01 0x01: closing

Control Code
Slave Variation 0x01 0x10: tripping

Date: 20131-03-01
10 Communications

Date: 20131-03-01
11 Installation
11 Installation
Table of Contents
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 11-3

11.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................ 11-3
11.3 Checking Shipment ...................................................................................... 11-4
11.4 Material and Tools Required........................................................................ 11-4
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions.................................................. 11-4
11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 11-5
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 11-6
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .......................................................................................................11-6
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ............................................................................................................11-6
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ...................................................................................11-7
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation..............................................................................11-8
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring.........................................................................................................11-8
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables...............................................................................................11-9
List of Figures
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-921..................................................................................... 11-5
Figure 11.6-2 panel cut-out of PCS-921................................................................................... 11-5
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot .................. 11-6
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system ................................................................................ 11-7
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay ............................................................................ 11-8
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination ........................................................................... 11-8
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ................................... 11-9

Date: 2011-07-26
11 Installation

Date: 2011-07-26
11 Installation
11.1 Overview
The device must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly
and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in
this section.
11.2 Safety Information

Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the
equipment.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
DANGER! Only insert or withdraw the PWR module while the power supply is switched
off. To this end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.
WARNING! Only insert or withdraw other modules while the power supply is switched off.
WARNING! The modules may only be inserted in the slots designated in Section 6.2.
Components can be damaged or destroyed by inserting boards in the wrong slots.
DANGER! Improper handling of the equipment can cause damage or an incorrect
response of the equipment itself or the primary plant.
WARNING! Industry packs and ribbon cables may only be replaced or the positions of
jumpers be changed on a workbench appropriately designed for working on electronic

equipment. The modules, bus backplanes are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when
not in the unit’s housing.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
 Should boards have to be removed from this relay installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.

Date: 2011-07-26
11 Installation
 Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
 Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for
electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
 Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
11.3 Checking Shipment

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Chapter “Technical Data”.
11.4 Material and Tools Required

The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this relay is mounted in cubicles).
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions

The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
1. The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
2. Severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, surge voltages of high amplitude and
short rise time, high levels of humidity and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided
as far as possible.
3. Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically

Date: 2011-07-26
11 Installation
(visibility of markings).
WARNING! Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of
this relay.
11.6 Mechanical Installation

The device adopts IEC standard chassis and is rack with modular structure. It uses an integral
faceplate and plug terminal block on backboard for external connections. PCS-921 series is IEC
4U high and 19” wide. Figure 11.6-1 shows its dimensions and Figure 11.6-2 shows the panel
cut-out.
482.6
291 465.0
101.6
177.0
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-921
465.0
101.6
179.0
4-Ф6.8
450.0
Figure 11.6-2 panel cut-out of PCS-921
NOTE! It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle
for heat emission of this relay.

Date: 2011-07-26
11 Installation
The safety instructions must be abided by when installing the boards, please see Section 11.2 for
the details.
Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring

11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
NOTE! All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
NOTE! If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts

Date: 2011-07-26
11 Installation
of it forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission
of interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
NOTE! For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip
(braided copper).
Door or hinged
equipment frame
Cubicle ground
rail close to floor
Braided
copper strip
Station
ground
Conducting
connection
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this relay, and the sign is “GND”. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear
panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.

Date: 2011-07-26
11 Installation
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Press/pinch fit
cable terminal
Braided
copper strip Terminal bolt
Contact surface
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring

There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this relay: braided copper
cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:
 Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2
 Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
 AC voltage inputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
 AC current inputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm2 ~ 4.0mm2
 Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable
 Ethernet communication: 4-pair screened twisted category 5E cable

Date: 2011-07-26
11 Installation
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables

A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for
further details about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.
01 02
03 04
Tighten 05 06
07 08
09 10
11 12
01
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables
DANGER! Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.

Date: 2011-07-26
11 Installation

Date: 2011-07-26
12 Commissioning
12 Commissioning
Table of Contents
12.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Commission Tools ...................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................ 12-2
12.5 Product Checks ........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized .......................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized ................................................................................................ 12-5
12.5.3 Print Fault Report............................................................................................................. 12-7
12.5.4 On-load Checks ............................................................................................................... 12-7
12.6 Final Checks ................................................................................................ 12-8

Date: 2011-07-26
12 Commissioning

Date: 2011-07-26
12 Commissioning
12.1 Overview
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
12.2 Safety Instructions
WARNING! Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Non-observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property
damage.
WARNING! Only the qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after
becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well
as with the applicable safety regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
 The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
 Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
 Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
 The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
 When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.
DANGER! Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before
the current leads to the device are disconnected.

Date: 2011-07-26
12 Commissioning
WARNING! Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar
with the commissioning of protection system, the operation of the plant and safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
12.3 Commission Tools

Minimum equipment required:
 Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
 Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V
respectively.
 Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
 Phase angle meter.
 Phase rotation meter.
NOTE! Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment:
 An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
 A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
 EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).
 PCS-900 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-2000.
12.4 Setting Familiarization

When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become
familiar with its operation.

Date: 2011-07-26
12 Commissioning
12.5 Product Checks
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized

This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.
 Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.
 User interfaces test
 Binary input circuits and output circuits test
 AC input circuits test
 Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
 Measuring elements test
 Timers test
 Measurement and recording test
 Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.
 On load test.
 Phase sequence check and polarity check.

Date: 2011-07-26
12 Commissioning
12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is
necessary.
 Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.
 Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section
meeting the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
 Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.
 Device plug-in modules
Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.
 Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
 Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button
Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.
12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:
 Voltage transformer circuits
 Current transformer circuits
 DC power supply

Date: 2011-07-26
12 Commissioning
 Optic-isolated control inputs
 Output contacts
 Communication ports
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customer’s normal practice.
12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter “Technical Data”,
before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter “Technical Data”. See
this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
WARNING! Energize this relay only if the power supply is within the specified operating
ranges in Chapter “Technical Data”.
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized

The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.

Date: 2011-07-26
12 Commissioning
12.5.2.2 Date and Time
If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip, auto-reclose when the
relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate
when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.
It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.
12.5.2.4 Testing HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “ALARM” LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “ALARM” LED extinguishes.
12.5.2.5 Testing AC Current Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.6 Testing AC Voltage Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.

Date: 2011-07-26
12 Commissioning
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.7 Testing Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for
terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
The status of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized
input and sign “0” denotes a de-energized input.
12.5.3 Print Fault Report

In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1) Trip event report
2) Binary input when protection devices start
3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5) The setting value when the protection device trips
12.5.4 On-load Checks

The objectives of the on-load checks are:
 Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
 Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).
 Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.

Date: 2011-07-26
12 Commissioning
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.
12.6 Final Checks
After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

Date: 2011-07-26
13 Maintenance
13 Maintenance
Table of Contents
13.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 13-3

13.2 Failure Tracing And Repair ......................................................................... 13-3
13.3 Replace Failed Modules ............................................................................. 13-3
13.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 13-5
13.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 13-5

Date: 2011-07-26
13 Maintenance

Date: 2011-07-26
13 Maintenance
NR numerical relay PCS-921 is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and
signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output
relays are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.
13.1 Appearance Check

1. The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in
the case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good
feeling can be operated flexibly.
2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary
system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board
when it is unnecessary.
3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.
13.2 Failure Tracing And Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “Superv Events” screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:
 Test circuit connections are correct
 Modules are securely inserted in position
 Correct DC power voltage is applied
 Correct AC inputs are applied
 Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual
13.3 Replace Failed Modules

If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can

Date: 2011-07-26
13 Maintenance
recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, CPU, SIG, BI, BO,
etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the CPU module replaced
should have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have
the same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu “Version Info”.
CAUTION!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.
1) Replacing a module
 Switch off the DC power supply
 Disconnect the trip outputs
 Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs
 Unscrew the module.
WARNING!
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
2) Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)
 Open the relay front panel
 Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
 Detach the HMI module from the relay
 Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
3) Replacing the AI, PWR, CPU, BI or BO module
 Unscrew the module connector
 Unplug the connector from the target module.
 Unscrew the module.
 Pull out the module

Date: 2011-07-26
13 Maintenance
 Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.
 After replacing the CPU module, input the application-specific setting values again.
WARNING!
Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off and only by
appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic precautions to
guard against electrostatic discharge.
WARNING!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.
DANGER!
After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set as before the
replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended operation of
switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons may also be
put in danger.
13.4 Cleaning
Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.
13.5 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40oC to +70oC, but the temperature of from 0oC
to +40oC is recommended for long-term storage.

Date: 2011-07-26
13 Maintenance

Date: 2011-07-26
Table of Contents
14.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................... 14-3

14.2 Disposal ....................................................................................................... 14-3

Date: 2011-07-26

Date: 2011-07-26
14.1 Decommissioning
1. Switching off
To switch off the PCS-921, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2. Disconnecting Cables
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
DANGER!
Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the PWR module of the
PCS-921, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply is
switched off.
DANGER!
Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module with the
primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CTs and VTs is
switched off.
3. Dismantling
The PCS-921 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
DANGER!
When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to
live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.
14.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
NOTE!
Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

Date: 2011-07-26

Date: 2011-07-26

In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version Software

Date Description of change
Source New Version
R1.00 R1.00 2011-11-07 Form the original manual.
R1.00
R1.00 R1.01 and 2011-12-29 Chapter 3, Chapter 7 and Chapter 9 are amended
R1.10
Modify remote control function
Two system settings are added
Two settings are added for VT circuit supervision module
Add GOOSE alarm signals
Modify logic of reclosing failure and success
R1.01 R1.02 R2.00 2013-03-01 Add common alarm signal [Alm_Insuf_Memory]
Modify the breaking capacity of binary output contact
Add symbol corresponding relationship about phase
sequence
Add corresponding description about double circuit
breakers application

Date: 2013-03-01

Date: 2013-03-01

PCS 921 X Instruction Manual EN Domestic General X R1.02 (EN - FZBH5101.0086.0003) PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

PCS 921 X Instruction Manual EN Domestic General X R1.02 (EN - FZBH5101.0086.0003) PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

PCS-921

Breaker Failure Protection

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Health and Safety

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection i

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

ii PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

 Printed circuit board

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Version: R1.02 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

P/N: EN_FZBH5101.0084.0003 Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208

Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com

Copyright © NR 2013. All rights reserved Email: nr_techsupport@nari-relays.com

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection iii

All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

8 Human Machine Interface

iv PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

15 Manual Version History

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

The following symbols are used in drawings:

BI Binary signal via opto-coupler

communication media by software tool

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection v

SET I> Input signal from comparator with setting

EN Input signal of logic setting for function enabling

SIG Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler

OTH Input of other signal

XXX Output signal

IDMT Timer (inverse-time characteristic)

---xxx is the symbol

Symbol Corresponding Relationship

vi PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1

Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921............................................................................... 1-1

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-a

1-b PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921

No. Function ANSI

 Breaker failure protection (50BF)

 Pole discrepancy protection (62PD)

 Dead zone protection (50DZ)

 Two stages overcurrent protection (50/51P)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-1

 Two stages earth-fault protection (50/51G)

 User programmable logic

 VT circuit supervision (VTS)

 CT circuit supervision (CTS)

 DC power supply supervision

 Voltage and current drift auto regulation

 Number of circuit breaker operation (single-phase tripping, three-phase tripping and

 1 RS-485 communication rear port for clock synchronization

1-2 PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP

 GOOSE communication function (optional NET-DSP plug-in module)

 1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting

 1 RS-232 rear port for printer